484437
321
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/330
Pagina verder
VOLVO V70 & XC70
Owners Manual Web Edition
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your
passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo
has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that
you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte-
nance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00
00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8
Volvo and the environment....................... 11
01
01 Safety
Seatbelts .................................................. 16
Airbags...................................................... 19
Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 26
WHIPS ...................................................... 27
When the systems deploy ........................ 29
Safety mode.............................................. 30
Child safety............................................... 31
02
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade.................. 44
Privacy locking*......................................... 49
Battery replacement, remote control key/
PCC*......................................................... 51
Keyless drive*............................................ 53
Locking/unlocking..................................... 56
Child safety locks...................................... 61
Alarm*....................................................... 62
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
03
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls.......................... 66
Key positions............................................ 74
Seats......................................................... 76
Steering wheel.......................................... 81
Lighting..................................................... 82
Wipers and washing.................................. 92
Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 95
Compass*............................................... 100
Power sunroof*....................................... 101
Alcoguard*.............................................. 103
Starting the engine.................................. 107
Starting the engine – Flexifuel................. 109
Starting the engine – external battery..... 111
Gearboxes............................................... 112
All-wheel drive – AWD*........................... 117
Foot brake............................................... 118
Hill Descent Control (HDC)..................... 120
Parking brake.......................................... 122
HomeLink
*............................................ 125
04
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages............................. 130
Climate control........................................ 137
Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-
senger compartment heater*.................. 144
Additional heater*.................................... 147
Audio system.......................................... 148
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system -
Dual Screen* .......................................... 161
Trip computer......................................... 166
DSTC – Stability and traction control sys-
tem.......................................................... 168
Adapting driving characteristics............. 170
Cruise control*........................................ 171
Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 173
Distance Alert*........................................ 181
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*........ 184
Driver Alert System – DAC*..................... 190
Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 193
Park assist syst*...................................... 196
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 199
Comfort inside the passenger compart-
ment........................................................ 202
Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 205
Built-in phone*........................................ 210
05
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving........... 216
Refuelling................................................ 219
Fuel......................................................... 220
Loading................................................... 224
Cargo area.............................................. 228
Driving with a trailer................................ 231
Towing and recovery.............................. 237
Table of contents
6
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06
06 Wheels and tyres
General ................................................... 242
Changing wheels ................................... 246
Tyre pressure ......................................... 248
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............ 249
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ........ 250
07
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment............................... 256
Lamps..................................................... 263
Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 269
Battery..................................................... 271
Fuses...................................................... 274
Car care.................................................. 282
08
08 Specifications
Type designations................................... 290
Dimensions and weights......................... 292
Engine specifications.............................. 298
Engine oil................................................ 300
Fluids and lubricants............................... 302
Fuel......................................................... 304
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres-
sure ........................................................ 308
Electrical system..................................... 313
Type approval......................................... 314
Symbols in the display............................ 315
Table of contents
7
09
09 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 318
Introduction
Important information
8
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different sit-
uations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
©
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual
also describes options (factory fitted equip-
ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not available in all cars - they have dif-
ferent equipment depending on adaptations
for the needs of different markets and national
or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-
ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for exam-
ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
sage texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
9
warning is ignored, may result in serious per-
sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G031592
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
Information
G031593
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different com-
ponents are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Introduction
Important information
10
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued
`
``
This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
The driving and safety systems in the car use
computers which check and share information
with each other on the car's function. One or
more of these computers may store informa-
tion on the systems they check during normal
driving, during the course of a collision or near-
collision. Stored information may be used by:
Volvo Car Corporation
Service or repair workshops
Police or other authorities
Other parties who claim legal entitlement
for access to the information or someone
who has permission from the owner to
access the information.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Volvo
therefore recommends that you always con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G000000
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values which influence all opera-
tions. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emis-
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-
sumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-
side.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Textile standard
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
sant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials. This
means that they also fulfil the requirements in
the Oeko-Tex 100 standard
1
, a major advance
towards a healthier passenger compartment
environment.
Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-
pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the
upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning
and fulfils the certification requirements.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
Drive economically - think ahead.
Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and War-
ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces
wear in cold weather and the engine rea-
ches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which lowers consumption and
reduces emissions.
High speed increases consumption con-
siderably due to increased wind resistance
- a doubling of speed increases wind resis-
tance 4 times.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a
workshop in the event of uncertainty about
how this type of waste should be discarded
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 216 and
306.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an envi-
ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in
this publication comes from FSC certified for-
ests or other controlled sources.
1
More information on www.oekotex.com
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
13
14
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 16
Airbags.................................................................................................... 19
Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 26
WHIPS .................................................................................................... 27
When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 29
Safety mode............................................................................................ 30
Child safety............................................................................................. 31
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
16
General information
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection.
Do not lean the backrest too far back. The
seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal
seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press-
ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A
loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear
seat
1
.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does
not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-
drawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Make sure that you:
do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down
(not over the abdomen)
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some
of the protective characteristics of the seat-
belt may have been lost, even if it appears
to be undamaged. In addition, replace the
seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The
new seatbelt must be type-approved and
intended for installation in the same position
as the replaced seatbelt.
1
Certain markets.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
``
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G020998
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn
in the correct way. The diagonal section should
wrap over the shoulder then be routed between
the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure
that it fits as close to the body as possible. In
addition, check that there are no twists in the
seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). The aim should be to posi-
tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-
ble between abdomen and steering wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G017726
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time depend-
ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. A message
appears in the information display when
the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear
doors has been opened. The message is
cleared automatically after driving for
approximately 30 seconds or after press-
ing the indicator stalk's READ button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-
belts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message on
the information display along with the
audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by press-
ing the READ button.
The message on the information display show-
ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-
able. Press the READ button to see stored
messages.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
18
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-
sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner
tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-
ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-
vides more effective restraint for the occu-
pants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any
foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts
and buckles would then possibly not func-
tion as intended in the event of a collision.
There is a risk of serous injury.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
``
19
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates when the remote con-
trol key is in key position II or III. The symbol
clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the
airbag system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driv-
ing, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indi-
cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys-
tem, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault
in the system. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop
immediately.
As well as the warning symbol, a message may
appear on the information display in appropri-
ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,
the warning triangle illuminates and
SRS
Airbag Service required
or SRS Airbag
Service urgent
appears in the display. Volvo
recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system
G018665
Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
G018666
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To
cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when
compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
20
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether or
not the seatbelts on the driver and passen-
ger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The airbag system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accord-
ingly so that one or more airbags are
deployed.
The capacity of the airbags is also adapted
to the collision force to which the vehicle is
subjected.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-
hand drive car.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-
hand drive car.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer-
ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
ger side. It is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must
be secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
21
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
01
22
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru-
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required posi-
tion. Volvo recommends that the remote con-
trol key's key blade be used to change posi-
tion.
For information on the key blade, see
page 47.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above
could endanger the life of passengers in the
car.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch
(Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the
airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated and the symbol
in the roof
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
senger seat if the message in the roof panel
(see page 23) indicates that the airbag is
deactivated and if the warning symbol for
the airbag system is also displayed in the
combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo
recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Activating/deactivating
Switch location
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger seat
when the airbag is activated. This applies to
everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
could endanger life.
Messages
2
2
G017724
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof panel
indicate that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
G017800
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to
key position II or III the warning symbol for
the airbag is displayed on the combined
instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see
page 19).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different key
positions for the remote control key, see
page 74.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
24
Side airbag
G032949
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat backr-
ests.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
bag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
The side airbag is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated
1
passenger air-
bag.
Location
G024377
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
G024378
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
25
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
01
26
Properties
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the
headlining along both sides of the roof and
protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended pro-
tection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the door windows. Other-
wise, the intended protection of the inflat-
able curtain, which is concealed in the head-
lining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
``
27
Protection against whiplash injury –
WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-
cially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the col-
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
28
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-
tem checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
01
29
When the systems deploy
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner,
front seat
In a frontal collision
and/or side-impact
accident and/or
rear-end collision
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
In a frontal collision
Airbags (SRS)
In a frontal collision
A
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact
accident
A
Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact
accident
A
Whiplash protection
WHIPS
In a rear-end colli-
sion
A
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col-
lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such
as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the
car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different
safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-
tems are deployed only once during a colli-
sion.
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the
centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-
nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Safety mode
01
30
Driving after a collision
G021062
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear on the
information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the col-
lision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
effect that the ignition is on, press the start
button. Then close the door and reinsert the
remote control key. The car's electronics will
now try to reset themselves to normal mode.
Then try to start the car.
If the message
Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must not
be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery serv-
ice used instead. Even if the car appears to be
driveable, hidden damage may make the car
impossible to control once moving.
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual
has been reset, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after
Safety
mode See manual
has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode message is displayed. Leave
the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transpor-
ted to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
31
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-
facing child seats until as late an age as pos-
sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then
front-facing booster cushions/child seats until
up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 33.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for your particular car. Using Vol-
vo's child safety equipment provides you with
optimum conditions for your child to travel
safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety
equipment fits and is easy to use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G020739
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instruc-
tions included.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-
age the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the pas-
senger seat, provided the passenger air-
bag is not activated
1
.
one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If
a child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
32
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel
on the passenger side, see the illustration on page
22.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
33
Recommended child seats
2
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E5 04301146.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E5 03301146.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 03301146.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 03301146.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro-
tective cushion between the child seat
and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
2
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
34
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro-
tective cushion between the child seat
and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171.
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Child seats which are universally
approved.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
35
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-
facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191.
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169.
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169.
Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169.
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139.
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139.
Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and
without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139.
Integrated booster cushion (Integrated
Booster Cushion) - available as a fac-
tory fitted option.
Type approval: E5 03168.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
36
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Integrated two-stage booster
cushions*
G017875
Correct position, the seatbelt is positioned above
the shoulder.
G017719
Incorrect position, the head must not be posi-
tioned above the head restraint and the seatbelt
must not be below the shoulder.
The booster cushions are specially designed to
provide optimum safety. In combination with
the seatbelt they are approved for children who
weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are 95
to 140 cm in height.
Check before driving that:
the 2-stage integrated booster cushion is
correctly set (see table below) and in
locked position
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder (see preced-
ing illustrations)
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro-
tection.
Stage 1 Stage 2
Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg
Length 115-140 cm 95-120 cm
For instructions on adjusting the booster cush-
ion's two levels, see pages 36–37.
Raising the two-stage booster cushion
Stage 1
Pull the handle forward and up in order to
release the booster cushion.
G017697
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
37
Press the booster cushion backwards to
lock.
Stage 2
Start from the lower stage. Press the but-
ton.
G017784
Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to lock.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replace-
ment is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifi-
cations or additions to the booster cushion.
If an integrated booster cushion has been
subjected to a major load, such as in con-
junction with a collision, the entire booster
cushion must be replaced. Even if the
booster cushion appears to be undamaged,
it may not afford the same level of protec-
tion. The booster cushion must also be
replaced if it is heavily worn.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster cush-
ion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be
reset by being fully folded into the seat
cushion. Refer to the heading below, Low-
ering the two-stage booster cushion.
Lowering the two-stage booster cushion
Lowering can take place from both the upper
and lower stage to fully lowered position in the
cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust
the booster cushion from the upper stage to
the lower stage.
Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
38
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the cushion in order to lock it.
WARNING
If the instructions regarding the two-stage
booster cushion are not followed then this
could cause serious injury to a child in the
event of an accident.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the
cushion before lowering.
NOTE
The booster cushion must be lowered first
when lowering the backrest.
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles
can be blocked from opening from the inside.
For more information, see page 61.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-
ceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
NOTE
The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory
for the passenger seat.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-
facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-
facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child
seat
D Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
39
Size
class
Description
F Transverse infant seat, left-
hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-
hand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if
the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation then the car model must be included
on the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F
G
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E OK OK
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E OK OK
D OK OK
C OK
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D OK OK
C OK
01 Safety
Child safety
01
40
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B
OK
A
OK
A
B1
OK
A
OK
A
A
OK
A
OK
A
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Upper mounting points for child seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for certain front-facing child seats.
These mounting points are located on the rear
of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
For cars with folding head restraints on the
outside seats the head restraints should be
folded to facilitate the installation of this
type of child seat.
NOTE
For cars equipped with a cargo area cover
over the cargo area, this must be removed
before a child seat can be fitted in the
mounting points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
routed under the rear head restraints before
being tensioned at the mounting point.
01 Safety
01
41
42
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 44
Privacy locking*....................................................................................... 49
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 51
Keyless drive*.......................................................................................... 53
Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 56
Child safety locks.................................................................................... 61
Alarm*...................................................................................................... 62
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
44
General
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys
or PCCs (Personal Car Communicator). They
are used to start the car and for locking and
unlocking.
More remote control keys can be ordered – up
to 6 can be programmed and used for the same
car.
The PCC has increased functionality com-
pared with the remote control key. The contin-
uation of this chapter describes the functions
available in both the PCC and the remote con-
trol key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Always remember to switch off the power
supply to power windows and sunroof by
removing the remote control key if the driver
leaves the car.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then new ones
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remain-
ing remote control keys must then be taken to
the workshop. The code of the missing remote
control key must be erased from the system as
a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked under Car settings
Car
Key memory
Number of keys. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 130.
Key memory
1
– door mirrors and driver's
seat
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see pages
77 and 97 .
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings
Car Key memory
Seat & mirror positions.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 130.
For cars with Keyless drive system, see
page 53.
Indicator for locking/unlocking
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
Locking - one flash
Unlocking - two flashes.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks have been activated once the doors have
been closed.
Selecting the function
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings
Light settings Lock
confirmation light and Car settings
Light
settings
Unlock confirmation light.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 130.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code.
The car can only be driven with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are rela-
ted to the electronic immobiliser:
1
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
45
Message Specification
Key error Try again
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting -
Remove the key, re-
insert it and try to
start again.
Car key not found
(Only applies to Key-
less drive with PCC.)
Error reading the
PCC during starting
- Try to start again.
If the error persists:
Press the remote
control key into the
ignition switch and
try to start again.
Immobiliser Try
start again
Error in immobiliser
system during star-
ting. If the fault per-
sists the recommen-
dation is to contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
For starting the car, see page 107.
Functions
G021078
Remote control key.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
G021079
PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.
Information
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close all
the windows and sunroof* simultaneously.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using
the remote control key, check that no one is
in danger of getting hands caught.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tail-
gate while the alarm is deactivated.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
46
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open all
windows simultaneously.
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driv-
er's door only with one press of the button and,
after a further press of the button - within 10
seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.
The function can be changed in the menu sys-
tem under Car settings
Lock settings
Doors unlock with both the alternatives All
doors
and Driver door, then all. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 130.
Approach light duration – Used to switch
on the car's lighting at a distance. For more
information, see page 87.
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm
for the tailgate only. On cars with power tail-
gate* the tailgate is opened after the button is
kept depressed. For more information, see
page 58.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec-
onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti-
vate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
Range
The remote control key's functions have a
range of about 20 m from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc. The
car can always be locked/unlocked using
the key blade, see page 47.
Unique functions PCC*
G021080
PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indica-
tor lamps.
Using the information button
±
Press the information button
.
> All indicator lamps flash for approxi-
mately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is inter-
rupted.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
``
47
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illumi-
nates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has trav-
elled around on the PCC), contact a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Indicator lamps display information in accord-
ance with the following illustration:
Green continuous light – the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has been
triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indi-
cator lamps – The alarm was triggered less
than 5 minutes ago.
Range PCC
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
tailgate is about 20 m from the car, for other
functions up to about 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light trav-
elling around on the PCC.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when
the information button is used within range
then this may be because the last commu-
nication between the PCC and the car was
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried
out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
the driver's door can be opened manually
if central locking cannot be activated with
the remote control key, see page 54.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated, see
page 61.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
48
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
access to the glovebox and cargo area
(privacy locking*) can be blocked, see
page 49.
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated,
see page 22.
Removing the key blade
G021082
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged, then the driver's door can be opened
as follows:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade
in the door handle's lock cylinder.
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For a car with the Keyless system, see
page 54.
02 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
49
General information on privacy locking
G017869
Active locks for remote control key with key blade.
G017870
Active locks for remote control key, without key
blade and privacy locking activated.
The privacy locking function is intended for
when the car is left for service, with a hotel
parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then
locked and the tailgate lock is disconnected
from the central locking - the tailgate cannot be
opened with either the central locking button in
the front doors or the remote control key.
This means that the remote control key without
key blade can only be used to activate/deacti-
vate the alarm, to open the doors and to drive
the car.
The remote control key without key blade can
then be handed over to the service or hotel staff
- the loose key blade is retained by the car
owner.
NOTE
Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover
over the cargo area before closing the tail-
gate, see page 230.
Activating/deactivating
G020508
Activating privacy locking.
To activate privacy locking:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is vertical in the locked posi-
tion for privacy locking.
Pull out the key blade. The information dis-
play shows a message at the same time.
The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate
can no longer be unlocked with the remote
control key or the central locking button.
02 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
02
50
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote
control key but keep it in a safe place
instead.
Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
For information on locking the glovebox only,
see page 57.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
51
Replacing the battery
The batteries should be replaced if:
the information symbol is illuminated and
the display shows
Replace car key
battery
and/or
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-
teries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals
with your fingers, as this could damage their
functionality.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and () sides.
Remove control key (1 battery)
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
2.
Install a new one with the (+) side down.
PCC* (2 batteries)
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2.
First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with
the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V
- one in the remote control key and two in the
PCC.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
52
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally-friendly way.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
53
Keyless lock and ignition system (only
PCC
1
)
General
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows
the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with-
out the need for a key. You simply have to have
the PCC with you. The system makes it easier
and more convenient to open the car, e.g.
when your hands are full.
Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless
function. Additional PCCs can be ordered, see
page 44.
PCC range
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from
the car door handle or tailgate. This means that
the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the PCC with him or her. It is not
possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is
on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-
cate the range covered by the system's anten-
nas.
If all PCCs are removed from the car when the
engine is running or key position II is active
(see page 74) and if all doors are closed, then
a warning message is shown in the information
display and an audio reminder signal sounds at
the same time.
The warning message clears and the audio
reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought
back to the car after:
a door has been opened and closed
the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch
the READ button has been pressed.
Handling the PCC safely
If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the
car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car
is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car,
opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be
reactivated. It is therefore important to handle
all PCCs with great care.
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.
Interference to PCC function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-
fere with the keyless drive system. For this rea-
son, do not place the PCC near mobile phones
or metallic objects.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the PCC and the key blade as a remote control
key., see page 45.
1
Personal Car Communicator, see page 46.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
54
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Locking
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the
outside door handles.
Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the
lock button on one of the door handles on the
outside.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
NOTE
On cars with automatic transmission, the
gear selector must be set in the P position
– otherwise the car cannot be locked or the
alarm armed.
Unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pres-
sure plate is actuated - open the door or tail-
gate as normal.
Unlocking with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then
the driver's door can be opened with the PCC's
detachable key blade (see page 47).
To access the lock cylinder the door handle's
plastic cover must be detached:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover is prized loose auto-
matically by the torque when the blade
is pushed straight up and into the open-
ing.
2. Insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and
unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC
in the ignition switch, see page 63.
Key memory
2
– driver's seat and door
mirrors
PCC memory function
If several people each with a PCC approach the
car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are
implemented for the person who opens the
driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC-A, but person B with PCC-
B shall drive, the settings can be changed in
three ways:
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
2
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
55
presses their PCC's unlock button, see
page 45.
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
page 77.
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
page 77 and 97.
Lock settings
The Keyless function can be adapted by indi-
cating in the menu system which doors shall be
unlocked, under Car settings
Lock
settings
Keyless entry.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 130.
Antenna location
G021179
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Tailgate, by wiper motor
Door handle, left rear
Roof, centre above rear seat
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
system's antennae with their pacemaker.
This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
56
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
From the outside
The remote control key can lock/unlock all
doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different
sequences for unlocking can be selected, see
Unlocking with the remote control key, page
45.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - lock or unlock the driver's door with
the detachable key blade, see page 47.
WARNING
Be aware that there is a risk that you can be
locked in the car if it is locked from the out-
side.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.
(For cars with alarm, see page 62.)
From the inside
Central locking
Central locking.
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked
or unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on either front door.
Press one side of the button to lock -
the other side
to unlock.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
Press the central locking button .
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
open all the side windows* simultaneously.
Pull the door handle once and release - the
door is unlocked. Pull the door handle
again to open the door.
Locking
Press the central locking button after
the front doors have been closed.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all the side windows and the sunroof*
simultaneously.
All doors can also be individually locked man-
ually with their lock buttons - the door in ques-
tion must then be closed.
Global opening
Press and hold the central locking button
(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win-
dows simultaneously - for example, to quickly
ventilate the passenger compartment during
hot weather.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings
Lock settings
Doors automatic lock. (For a description of
the menu system, see page 130.)
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
Glovebox
G020548
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
blade. (For information on the key blade, see
page 47).
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
For information on privacy locking, see
page 49.
Tailgate
Unlocking with the remote control key
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and
the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the
remote control key's
button.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel stops to
show that alarm for the whole of the car is not
armed. The alarm's level and movement sen-
sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and
lift the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Unlocking the car from inside
To unlock the tailgate:
±
Press the lighting panel button (1).
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be
opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
locked from the inside).
Locking with the remote control key
±
Press the remote control key's button for
locking,
, see page 45.
> If the car is equipped with an alarm* the
alarm indicator on the instrument panel
starts to flash, which means that the
alarm is armed.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
58
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Power operated tailgate*
G017876
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the height of the roof when
using power operation. Do not use power
tailgate operation with low roof heights, see
under the heading "Interrupt opening/clos-
ing the tailgate".
NOTE
If the system has been operating con-
tinuously for more than 60 seconds then
it is switched off to avoid overloading. It
can be used again after about 10
minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected then the cover must be
opened and closed manually once in
order to reset the system.
Snow and wind
If the tailgate is forced down by something just
when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or
strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to
lower, then it is closed automatically.
Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening/closing then the
pinch protection is activated.
During opening - power tailgate operation
is deactivated and the tailgate is disen-
gaged.
During closing - the tailgate returns to the
fully open position.
WARNING
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when
opening/closing. Before starting to open/
close; make sure that there is nobody close
to the tailgate as a crushing injury could
have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Manual tailgate operation
The system is disengaged if the rubberised
pressure plate beneath the outside handle is
actuated a second time. The tailgate can then
be operated manually.
Opening the tailgate
The tailgate can be opened three
ways (two of which involve this but-
ton):
Long press on the button in the lighting
panel - hold the button depressed until the
tailgate starts to open.
Long press on the button on the remote
control key - hold the button depressed
until the tailgate starts to open.
Lightly press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle and raise the
tailgate.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
59
Closing the tailgate
Close using this button on the tailgate
or manually.
Press the button – the tailgate closes auto-
matically.
Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate
This can be done four ways (of which
three involve this button):
Press the lighting panel button
Press the remote control key button
Press the tailgate's button
Press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle.
Tailgate movement is stopped following the
same pattern as when pinch protection is trig-
gered. Refer to this chapter's section with the
heading "Pinch protection".
Deadlocks *
1
Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and
door handles are mechanically disengaged,
which prevents doors being opened from the
inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after an approximately
10 second delay after the doors have been
locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The driver's
door can also be unlocked with the detachable
key blade.
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Navigation
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1.
Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 130).
2.
Select
Reduced guard.
1
Only in combination with alarm.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
60
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3.
Select
Activate once.
> The instrument panel display shows the
message
Reduced guard See
manual
and the deadlocks function is
switched off when the car is locked.
or
±
Select
Ask on exit.
> Each time the engine is switched off the
audio system's display shows the mes-
sage
Press ENTER to reduce guard
until engine is started Press EXIT to
cancel. - then select one of the follow-
ing alternatives:
If you want to switch off deadlocks
±
Press ENTER and lock the car. (Note that
the alarm's movement and tilt detectors*
are switched off at the same time, see
page 62.)
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the instru-
ment panel display shows the message
Full guard at which the deadlocks
function and the alarm's movement and
tilt detectors are re-engaged.
If you do not want to change the locking
system
±
Select no options at all and lock the car.
or
±
Press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
Remember that the car's alarm is armed
when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
Manual blocking of the rear doors
The child safety locks prevent children from
opening a rear door from the inside.
G021077
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
±
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob, see page 47.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
NOTE
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Electrical locking of the rear doors*
and power windows
Control panel driver's door.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear:
windows can only be opened with the driv-
er's door control panel
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The child safety locks are activated/deacti-
vated in all key positions (see page 74 and up
to 2 minutes after the remote control key has
been removed from the ignition switch. If a
door is opened within this time, the function is
deactivated.
±
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The information display shows the mes-
sage
Rear child locks Activated and
the button's lamp illuminates when the
locks are active.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
62
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Activated alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
the battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor-
mation display shows a message. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered
if the car is left with a window or the sunroof
open or if the passenger compartment
heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated
passenger compartment heater (or a porta-
ble electric heater) shall be used - direct the
airflow from the air vents so that they are not
pointing upwards in the passenger com-
partment.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
Alarm indicator
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm (and until the remote control key is
inserted in the ignition switch and key posi-
tion I is selected) – Alarm has been trig-
gered.
Arming the alarm
±
Press the remote control key lock button.
Disarming the alarm
±
Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
±
Press the remote control key unlock button
or insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch.
Other alarm functions
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within
2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-
armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-
pens:
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63
battery which works independently of the
car battery.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be switched off with the
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged, the car can be disarmed and the
engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indica-
tor flashes rapidly and the siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in the car or during transport
on a car train or a car ferry - the movement and
tilt sensors can be temporarily deactivated.
The procedure is the same as with the tempo-
rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 59.
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector in the
passenger compartment
1. Close all windows. Remain in the car.
2. Arm the alarm, see page 62.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for-
ward and back at backrest height.
> A siren sounds and all direction indica-
tors flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Testing the alarm sensors in the doors
1. Arm the alarm, see page 62.
2. Wait 15 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door using the key
blade.
4. Open the driver's door.
> A siren sounds and all direction indica-
tors flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Testing the alarm sensors for the bonnet
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement
sensor, see the previous section Reduced
alarm level.
2. Arm the alarm, see page 62. Remain in the
car and lock the doors with the button on
the remote control key.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard.
> A siren sounds and all direction indica-
tors flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
64
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 66
Key positions.......................................................................................... 74
Seats....................................................................................................... 76
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 81
Lighting................................................................................................... 82
Wipers and washing................................................................................ 92
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 95
Compass*.............................................................................................. 100
Power sunroof*..................................................................................... 101
Alcoguard*............................................................................................ 103
Starting the engine................................................................................ 107
Starting the engine – Flexifuel............................................................... 109
Starting the engine – external battery................................................... 111
Gearboxes............................................................................................. 112
All-wheel drive – AWD*......................................................................... 117
Foot brake............................................................................................. 118
Hill Descent Control (HDC)................................................................... 120
Parking brake........................................................................................ 122
HomeLink
*.......................................................................................... 125
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
66
Instrument overview
Left-hand drive.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
Function Page
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
82,
85, 134,
166
Cruise control 171, 173
Horn, airbags 20, 81
Combined instrument
panel
69, 73
Menu, audio and phone
control
130,
148, 205
Ignition switch 74
Start/stop button 107
Hazard warning flashers 85
Door handle
Control panel 56, 61,
95, 97
Menu control and audio
system
130, 149
Climate control, ECC 139
Function Page
Gear selector 112
Controls for active chas-
sis (Four-C)*
170
Wipers and washing 92, 93
Steering wheel adjust-
ment
81
Parking brake 122
Bonnet opener 256
Seat adjustment* 76
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
57, 82,
219
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
68
Right-hand drive.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
Function Page
Hazard warning flashers 85
Ignition switch 74
Start/stop button 107
Cruise control 171, 173
Combined instrument
panel
69, 73
Horn, airbags 20, 81
Menu, audio and phone
control
130,
148, 205
Wipers and washing 92, 93
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
57, 82,
219
Door handle
Control panel 56, 61,
95, 97
Seat adjustment* 76
Bonnet opener 256
Parking brake 122
Function Page
Steering wheel adjust-
ment
81
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
82,
85, 134,
166
Controls for active chas-
sis (Four-C)*
170
Gear selector 112
Climate control, ECC 139
Menu control and audio
system
130, 149
Information displays
The information displays show information on
some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control,
trip computer and messages. The information
is shown with text and symbols.
There are further descriptions under the func-
tions that use the information displays.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
70
Meters
Meters in the combined instrument panel.
Speedometer
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
166, and Refuelling, page 219.
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Indicator, information and warning
symbols
Indicator and warning symbols.
Main beam and direction indicator symbol
Indicator and information symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
1
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in
key position II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols
should go out except the parking brake sym-
bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-
engaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out after 5 seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator and information symbols
Sym-
bol
Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 257.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
``
71
Sym-
bol
Specification
Left-hand direction indicators
Right-hand direction indicators
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system con-
tinues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located
on the driver's side.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-
ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature
is below 2 °C. The car can be started once the
symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the informa-
tion display. The message text is cleared with
the READ button, see page 134, or it disap-
pears automatically after a time (time depend-
ing on which function is indicated). The infor-
mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunc-
tion with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym-
bol and message are cleared using the
READ button, or clear automatically after a
while.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash
Left/right-hand direction indicators
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
Indicator and warning symbols
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressure
A
Parking brake applied
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
72
Symbol Specification
Fault in brake system
Warning
A
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure
is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages
257 and 258.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-
nates and the oil level is normal, contact a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol
flashes during application, and then changes
over to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.
Read the message on the information display.
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recom-
mends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front
seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,
see page 261.
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 261. If the brake fluid level is nor-
mal but the symbols are still illuminated,
the car can be driven, with great care, to
a workshop to have the brake system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi-
nated at the same time, there is a risk that
the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan-
atory text is shown on the information display
at the same time. The symbol remains visible
until the fault has been rectified but the text
message can be cleared with the READ but-
ton, see page 134. The warning symbol can
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
also illuminate in conjunction with other sym-
bols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accord-
ance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using the READ button.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet
2
or tailgate is not
closed properly then the information or warn-
ing symbol illuminates together with an explan-
atory text message in the combined instrument
panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid,
whichever is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h then the information
symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
Trip meter
Trip meter and controls.
Display for trip meter
Controls for switching between trip meters
T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip
meters.
The meters are used to measure short dis-
tances.
One short press on the control switches
between the two trip meters
T1 and T2. A long
press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active
trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the
display.
Clock
Clock and setting knob.
Controls for setting the clock.
Information display for showing the time.
Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set
the time. The set time is shown in the informa-
tion display.
The clock can be temporarily replaced by a
symbol in conjunction with a message, see
page 134.
2
Only cars with alarm*.
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
74
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Insert and remove the remote control
key
G021126
Ignition switch with inserted remote control key.
NOTE
For cars with keyless function*, see
page 53.
Insert the key
Hold the end of the remote control key with the
detachable key blade and insert the key in the
ignition switch. After a gentle press on the key
it is drawn into the lock.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch may
jeopardise the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-
able key blade, see page 47.
Withdraw the key
The remote control key is ejected after a gentle
press on it. (Automatic gearbox* must be in
position P.)
Functions
The remote control key's 3 different key posi-
tions can be reached without the need to start
the engine. The table shows the functions
available in each key position.
NOTE
To reach key position I or II without starting
the engine - do not depress the brake/
clutch pedal when the following operations
are carried out.
Key position 0
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and gently press it - The key is drawn
into the lock.
Key position I
With the remote control key inserted into the
ignition switch - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Key position II
With the remote control key inserted into the
ignition switch - Press on START/STOP
ENGINE for about 2 seconds.
Back to key position 0
To return to key position 0 from position I or II
- Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
Posi-
tion
Function
0
Odometer, clock and tempera-
ture gauge are illuminated. The
steering lock is deactivated. The
audio system can be used.
I
Sunroof*, power windows, 12 V
socket in the passenger compart-
ment, RTI*, phone*, ventilation
fan, ECC and windscreen wipers
can be used.
II
The headlamps come on. Warn-
ing/indicator lamps illuminate for
5 seconds. All equipment oper-
ates apart from heated seats and
rear window defroster, which only
work when the engine is running.
For information on the audio system's func-
tions with remote control key removed, see
page 148.
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/switching off the
engine, see page 107.
Towing
For important information about the remote
control key during towing, see page 237.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
76
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Front seats
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the
wheel
1
.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving. Make
sure that the seat is in locked position in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Lowering the front seat backrest
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
ble.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
1
Also applies to power seat.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
Power seat*
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
Preparations
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi-
tion I and can always be made when the engine
is running.
Seat with memory function*
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Hold the button depressed to store set-
tings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
Key memory* in remote control key
2
The positions of the driver's seat and the door
mirrors
3
are stored in the key memory when the
car is locked with the remote control key.
When the car is unlocked with the same remote
control key it was locked with and the driver's
2
For key memory for keyless drive, see page 54.
3
Only if the car is equipped with power seat and retractable power door mirrors.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
78
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
door is opened, the driver's seat and also the
door mirrors automatically adopt the positions
stored in the key memory.
NOTE
The seat and the door mirrors do not move
if they are already set the relevant position.
It is also possible to use the key memory by
pressing the unlock button on the remote con-
trol key when the driver's door is open.
The key memory can be activated/deactivated
under Car Key memory
Seat & mirror
positions. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 130.
NOTE
The key memory in the two remote control
keys and the seat's three memories are
completely independent of each other.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the buttons to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under
the seat during adjustment. Ensure that
none of the backseat passengers will be
trapped.
Heated/ventilated seats*
For heated/ventilated seats, see page 140.
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Adjust the head restraint according to passen-
ger height so that the whole of the back of the
head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed
down.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually
until a "click" can be heard.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the
rear seat upholstery.
The triple-section backrest can be folded in
different ways.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be folded forward fully.
The left-hand section can be folded sepa-
rately.
The centre section can be folded sepa-
rately.
The right-hand section can only be folded
together with the centre section.
If the entire backrest is to be folded then
the different sections should be folded
separately.
If the centre backrest is being lowered -
fold and adjust the centre backrest's head
restraint downwards, see page 78.
The outer head restraints are lowered auto-
matically when the outer backrests are
lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking
handle
while folding the backrest for-
ward at the same time. A red indicator on
the lock catch
shows that the backrest
is no longer locked in place.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked
after raising.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
80
1. The remote control key must be in position
I or II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
head restraints to improve rearward visi-
bility.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are any passengers using of the outer
seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked posi-
tion after being raised.
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
Adjusting
G021138
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust and secure the steering wheel before
driving.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see
page 170.
Keypads*
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control, see page 171
Adaptive cruise control, see page 173
Audio and phone control, see page 148
Horn
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
82
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Light switches
G021141
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Rear fog lamp
Front fog lamps*
Light switches
Thumbwheel
1
for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 74.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the
car is heavily laden.
1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote
control key in position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Cars with Xenon headlamps* have automatic
headlamp levelling and therefore do not have
the thumbwheel.
Main/dipped beam
G021142
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
1
Not available for cars equipped with Xenon headlamps*.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
83
Posi-
tion
Specification
Automatic
A
/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
Dipped beam. Main beam and
main beam flash work in this
position.
A
Applies to certain markets.
NOTE
Main beam can only be activated in position
.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer-
ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Dipped beam
When the engine is started, dipped beam is
activated automatically
2
if the headlamp con-
trol is in position
. If necessary, auto-
matic dipped beam for this position can be
deactivated by a workshop. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
In position
dipped beam is always acti-
vated automatically when the engine is running
or when the remote control key is in position
II.
Main beam
Main beam can only be activated when the
headlamp control is in position
. Acti-
vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel to the end
position and release.
When main beam has been activated the sym-
bol
illuminates in the combined instru-
ment panel.
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-
lamps (Active Bending Lights - ABL) the light
from the headlamps follows the steering wheel
movement in order to provide maximum light-
ing in bends and junctions and so provide
increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
function the
symbol illuminates in the
combined instrument panel at the same time
as the information display shows an explana-
tory text and a further illuminated symbol.
2
Applies to certain markets.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
84
Symbol Display Specifica-
tion
Headlamp
failure
Service
required
The system
is disen-
gaged. Visit
a workshop
if the mes-
sage
remains.
Volvo rec-
ommends
that you
contact an
authorised
Volvo work-
shop.
The function is only active in twilight or dark-
ness and only when the car is moving.
The function
3
can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings
Light settings
Active bending lights. For a description of the
menu system, see page 130.
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see
page 87.
Position/parking lamps
G021144
Headlamp control in position for position/parking
lamps.
Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi-
tion (number plate lighting comes on at the
same time).
Rear position lamps also come on when the
tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody
behind.
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking. For information on the Emergency
brake lights and automatic hazard warning
flashers, see page 118.
Front fog lamps
G021145
Button for front fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can be switched on along
with main/dipped beam or
position/parking lamps.
The front fog lamps* can be switched on along
with main/dipped beam or
position/parking lamps.
3
Activated on delivery from the factory.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
85
Press the button for on/off. The light in the but-
ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on.
NOTE
Regulations for using front fog lamps vary
between different countries.
Rear fog lamp
G021146
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and
can only be switched on in combination with
main/dipped beam or the front fog lamps.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp
indicator symbol
on the combined
instrument panel and the light in the button illu-
minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary
between different countries.
Hazard warning flashers
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in
the combined instrument panel flash when the
hazard warning flashers are in use.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car brakes so suddenly
that the emergency brake lights are activated
and speed is below 30 km/h. They remain on
when the car has stopped and are deactivated
automatically when the car is driven off again
or the button is depressed. For more informa-
tion on Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers, see page 118.
Direction indicators/flashers
G021148
Direction indicators/flashers.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times. The function
can be activated/deactivated under Car
settings
Light settings Turn
indicators, 3-
flash. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 131.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
86
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 70.
Interior lighting
G021149
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
the engine has been switched off and the
remote control key is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
Front roof lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or off
by pressing the relevant button in the roof con-
sole.
Rear roof lighting
G021150
Rear roof lighting.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-
ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-
tively when a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 204, is switched on and off respectively
when the cover is opened or closed.
Lighting, cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Automatic lighting
The switch for passenger compartment light-
ing has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
Off – right-hand side depressed, automatic
lighting deactivated.
Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-
vated.
On – left-hand side depressed, passenger
compartment lighting on.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
87
Neutral position
When the button is in neutral position the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
following.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade, see pages 45 or 48
the engine is switched off and the remote
control key is in position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of the
doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off auto-
matically after two minutes.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
the same way as with main beam flash, see
page 82.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set under Car
settings
Light settings Home safe light
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 130.
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 45, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote
control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,
number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and
courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach light-
ing should be kept on can be set under Car
settings
Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 130.
Adjusting headlamp pattern
G021151
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
88
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G021152
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be
set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat-
tern will also better illuminate the verge.
Xenon headlamps*
G019442
Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern.
Normal position – the headlamp pattern is
correct for the country in which the car was
delivered.
Adapted position – designed for opposite
headlamp pattern.
WARNING
The headlamps must be handled with
extreme care due to the Xenon lamp being
supplied from a high-voltage unit.
The country in which the car is delivered deter-
mines whether normal position is designed for
right or left-hand traffic.
Example 1
If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be
driven in the UK then the headlamps must be
set to the adjusted position, see preceding
illustration.
Example 2
A car that is delivered in the UK is designed for
left-hand traffic and is driven there with the
headlamps in normal position, see preceding
illustration.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:2,
see page 91. Use a photocopier with a
zoom function for example:
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
``
89
3. Start from the design line on the headlamp
lenses, see the dotted line on the side
90. Position the self-adhesive templates
at the right distance from each design line
using the illustration and the dimensions in
the following list:
A = LHD Right - approx. 86 mm
B = LHD Left - approx. 40 mm
C = RHD Right - 0 mm
D = RHD Left - approx. 96 mm
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
90
Aligning the templates
G033954
Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
91
Templates for halogen headlamps
G021155
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
92
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Windscreen wipers
1
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when inter-
mittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter -
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in and that any snow or ice on the wind-
screen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-
screen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and
replacement of wiper blades see see
page 269 and 282.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the
button the rain sensor symbol
is shown
in the right-hand display in the combined
instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position
I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch
must be in position 0 or in the position for a
single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
. The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-
tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.)
Deactivating
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
ton
or move the stalk switch down to
another wiper program.
1
Replacing the wiper blades see page 269, service position, wiper blade see page 269 and filling washer fluid see page 270.
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor while the car is running
or the remote control key is in position I or
II. The symbol in the combined instrument
panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps and the headlamps are washed once
the stalk switch has been released.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Wiper and washer, rear window
G017632
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window
washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats. The
rear window wiper works again after a cool-
ing period (30 seconds or longer, depending
on the heat in the motor and the outside
temperature).
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
94
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping
2
. The function stops when reverse gear
is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
tinuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensor, the rear window
wiper is activated with reversing, if the sen-
sor is activated and it is raining.
2
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
General
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which pro-
vides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insu-
lation in the passenger compartment.
The windscreen and other windows* have lami-
nated glass.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
Windows are treated with a coating
that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance, see
page 283.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. Use the defroster to
remove ice from the mirrors, see
page 98.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
A 47 mm
B 87 mm
The windscreen is equipped with a heat-
reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equip-
ment, it should be positioned on the part of the
windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the
highlighted area in the above illustration).
Power windows
G018516
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 61.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that none of the rear seat passengers
is in danger of becoming trapped in any way
when closing the windows from the driver's
door.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
96
WARNING
Make sure that children or other passengers
are not in danger of becoming trapped in
any way when closing the windows, in par-
ticular when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car, remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car.
Operating
G018517
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. Each control
panel in the other doors can only control its
own respective power window. The power win-
dows can only be controlled with one control
panel at a time.
In order that the power windows can be used
the remote control key must be in position I or
II. After the car has been running the power
windows can be operated for several minutes
even when the remote control key has been
removed, but not however after the door has
been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to force the pinch pro-
tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g.
with ice, by continuously holding the button up
until the window is closed. The pinch protec-
tion is reactivated after a brief pause.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs auto-
matically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or from
inside with central locking, see pages 45 and
56
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to raise the window to its end position and
hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
Resetting must be carried out to ensure that
pinch protection works.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
97
Door mirrors
G018518
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illumi-
nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti-
mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur-
ther away than they actually are.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1.
Press the buttons L and R simultaneously
(the remote control key must be at least in
key position I).
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors auto-
matically stop in the fully retracted posi-
tion.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended posi-
tion.
Storing the position*
The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-
ory when the car has been locked with the
remote control key. When the car is unlocked
with the same remote control key the mirrors
and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions
when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car Key memory
Seat & mirror
positions. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 130.
Angling the door mirror when parking
1
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
±
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing
the button labelled L or R respectively
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking
1
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the driver
can see the side of the road when parking for
example. When reverse gear is disengaged the
mirror automatically returns to its original posi-
tion after a while.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings
Side mirror settings
Auto tilt left mirror or Auto tilt right
mirror
. For a description of the menu system,
see page 130.
Automatic retraction when locking
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are auto-
matically retracted/extended.
1
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 77.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
98
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings
Side mirror settings
Fold mirr. when locking. For a description
of the menu system, see page 130.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1.
Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
tons.
2.
Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 87.
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting
and ice from the rear window and the door mir-
rors.
One press of the button starts the heating. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Disconnect the heating as soon as the
ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the
battery unnecessarily. However, the heating is
switched off automatically after a certain time.
The heating can be engaged automatically if
the car is started in an outside temperature
lower than +7 °C. The automatic defrosting
function must then be activated under Climate
settings
Auto. rear defroster. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 130.
Interior rearview mirror
G021342
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when lights
from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is
not available in mirrors with automatic dim-
ming.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
The compass* can only be specified for rear-
view mirrors with automatic dimming, see
page 100.
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
03
100
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations:
N (north), NE (north
east),
E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in key position II, see
page 74. To deactivate/activate the compass -
press in the button on the rear side of the mirror
using a paper clip for example.
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to work
correctly.
C is shown in the mirror's display if
the compass needs calibrating.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For optimum calibration - switch off all elec-
trical equipment (climate control system,
wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.
3. Press and hold the button on the rear of the
rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)
until
C is shown again (approx. 6 seconds).
4.
Drive off as usual.
C disappears from the
display when calibration is complete.
Alternative calibration method: Drive
slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than
8 km/h until
C disappears from the display
when calibration is complete.
Selecting the zone
G030295
Magnetic zones.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The correct zone must be selected for the com-
pass to work correctly.
1. The remote control key should be in posi-
tion II, see page 74.
2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the
rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)
for at least 3 seconds. The number for the
current area is shown.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-
ber for the required geographic area
(
1–15) is shown.
4. The display will revert to showing the com-
pass direction after a few seconds.
03 Your driving environment
Power sunroof*
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
General
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at
the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or
II is required for the sunroof to be opened.
Horizontal opening
G017823
Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Opening
For maximum sunroof opening, move the con-
trol back to the position for automatic opening
and release.
Open manually by pulling the control back-
wards to the point of resistance for manual
opening. The sunroof moves to maximum open
position as long as the button is kept
depressed.
Closing
Close manually by pushing the control for-
wards to the point of resistance for manual
closing. The sunroof moves to closed position
as long as the button is kept depressed.
WARNING
Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed.
The sunroof's pinch-protection function
only operates during automatic closing, not
manual.
Close automatically by pressing the control to
the position for automatic closing and then
release it.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched off
by removing the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the sunroof by removing the
remote control key if the driver leaves the
car.
Vertical opening
G028900
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-
trol upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-
trol down.
03 Your driving environment
Power sunroof*
03
102
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
G021345
One long press on the lock button closes the
sunroof and all the windows, see pages 45 and
56 . The doors and the tailgate are locked. To
interrupt closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed using the remote
control key, check that no one is in danger
of becoming trapped in any way.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-
matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the
handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is trig-
gered if it is blocked by an object during auto-
matic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stop
and automatically open to the previous posi-
tion.
Wind deflector
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded
up when the sunroof is in the open position.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
103
General information on the Alcolock
The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt
the driver from responsibility. It is always the
responsibility of the driver to be sober and
to drive the car safely.
Functions
1. Nozzle for breath test.
2. Switch.
3. Transmission button.
4. Lamp for battery status.
5. Lamp for result of breath test.
6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta-
tus:
Lamp (4) Battery status
Green flashing Charging in pro-
gress
Green Fully charged
Yellow Semi-charged
Red Discharged - fit the
charger in the holder
or connect the
power supply cable
from the glovebox.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When indicator lamp (6) is green the Alco-
lock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
4. If no message is shown then the transmis-
sion to the car may have failed - in which
case, press button (3) to transmit the result
to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock
in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
104
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Result after breath test
Lamp (5) + Dis-
play text
Specification
Green lamp + Alco-
guard Approved
test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content
measured.
Yellow lamp + Alco-
guard Approved
test
Engine starting pos-
sible - measured
alcohol content is
above 0.1 promille
but below the limit
value in force
A
.
Red lamp + Disap-
proved test Wait 1
minute
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value
in force
A
.
A
Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.
See also the section entitled General information on the
Alcolock on page 103
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accu-
rate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is car-
ried out in the event of a change of driver -
depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop
1
every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
display shows
Alcoguard Calibr. required. If
calibration is not carried out within these 30
days then normal engine starting will be
blocked - only starting with the Bypass func-
tion will then be possible, see page 105 sec-
tion Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on
its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap-
pears each time the engine is started - only
recalibration at a workshop
1
can clear the mes-
sage permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-
ing time (sec-
onds)
+10 — +85 10
–5 — +10 60
–40 — –5 180
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The display shows
Alcoguard insert
power cable
. In which case, connect the
power supply cable from the glovebox and wait
until indicator lamp (6) is green.
1
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
105
In extremely cold weather the heating time can
be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation, or if the
Alcolock is out of order or has been removed,
it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to
drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in
memory, see page 10 in the section,
Recording data.
After the Bypass function has been activated
the display shows
Alcoguard Bypass
enabled
the whole time while driving and can
only be reset by a workshop
1
.
The Bypass function can be tested without the
error message being logged - in which case,
carry out all the steps without starting the car.
The error message is cleared when the car is
locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop
1
.
Activating the Bypass function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch READ button and the button for
hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows
Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and
then
Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after
which the engine can be started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop
1
.
Activating the Emergency function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch READ button and the button for
hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display shows
Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the
engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop
1
.
Symbols and display messages
In addition to the previously described mes-
sages, the combined instrument panel's dis-
play can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Restart
possible
The engine has been
switched off for less
than 30 minutes -
engine starting pos-
sible without new
test.
Alcoguard Service
required
Contact a work-
shop
1
.
Alcoguard No sig-
nal
Transmission failed -
send manually with
button (3) or take a
new breath test.
Alcoguard Invalid
test
Test failed - take a
new breath test.
Alcoguard Blow
longer
Blowing too short -
blow for longer.
Alcoguard Blow
softer
Blowing too hard -
blow more gently.
1
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
106
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Blow
harder
Blowing too weak -
blow harder.
Alcoguard wait
Preheating
Heating not finished
- wait for text
Alco-
guard Blow 5 sec-
onds
.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
Petrol and diesel engines
G021126
Ignition switch with inserted remote control key
and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-
able key blade, see page 47.
1. Fit the remote control key in the ignition
switch - Gently press the key until it is
drawn into the lock. Note that if the car is
equipped with an alcolock then a breath
test must first be approved before the
engine can be started, see page 103.
2.
Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed
1
. (For
cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.)
3.
Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
NOTE
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a
slight delay before the engine can be started
-
Engine Preheating is displayed in the
meantime.
The starter motor works until the engine has
started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die-
sel up to 60 seconds).
If the engine does not start - try again by hold-
ing in the START/STOP ENGINE button until
the engine starts.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car -
especially if there are children in the car. For
information on how the key is removed from
the ignition switch, see page 74.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is so that the emissions
system can reach normal operating tem-
perature as quickly as possible, which min-
imises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Keyless drive
Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel
engines. For more information on Keyless
drive, see page 53.
NOTE
One precondition for starting the car is that
one of the car's remote control keys with the
keyless drive* function is located inside the
passenger compartment or the cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key with
the Keyless drive* function from the car
while driving or during towing.
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine - Press START/STOP
ENGINE.
1
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
108
If the car has an automatic gearbox and the
gear selector is not in a position P or if the car
is moving - Press twice or hold the button
depressed until the engine stops.
Steering lock
The steering lock opens when the START/
STOP ENGINE button is depressed after the
remote control key has been pressed into the
ignition switch.
The steering lock is activated when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
Key positions
For information on the remote control key's dif-
ferent key positions, see page 74
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
109
General information about starting
with Flexifuel
The engine is started in the same way as in a
petrol-engined car.
In the event of starting difficulties
If the engine does not start at the first start
attempt:
Make further attempts to start with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
If the engine still does not start
The outside temperature is lower than +5 °C:
1. Connect the engine block heater for at
least 1 hour.
2. Make further attempts to start with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
If the engine does not start despite repeated
start attempts, you are recommended to
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Engine block heater*
Electrical input to the engine block heater.
When the temperature is expected to be lower
than –10 °C and the car has been refuelled with
bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should
be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick
starting of the engine.
The lower the temperature, the longer the time
required with the engine block heater. At
-20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3
hours.
Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine
block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre-
heated engine involves significantly lower
emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For
this reason you should aim to use the engine
block heater throughout the winter months.
WARNING
The engine block heater is powered by high
voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec-
tric engine block heater and its electrical
connections must only be carried out by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reserve
fuel:
In the event of stalling due to an empty
fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve
fuel can may make the engine difficult
to start in extreme cold. This is avoided
by filling the reserve fuel can with 95
octane petrol.
For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol
E 85 fuel, see page 221 and 304.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
03
110
Fuel adaptation
If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car
has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice
versa) then the engine may run slightly
unevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor-
tant to allow the engine to accustom itself
(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.
Adaptation takes place automatically when the
car is driven for a short period at an even
speed.
IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has been
changed an adaptation should be made by
driving at an even speed for about 15
minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or discon-
nected then a slightly longer period of driving
is required for the adaptation as the memory
for the electronics has been cleared.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – external battery
03
111
Jump starting
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
The following points are recommended when
using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk
of an explosion:
1. Insert the remote control key in key posi-
tion 0, see page 74.
2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.
3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch
off the donor car's engine in the other car
and ensure that the cars do not touch one
another.
4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive
terminal on the donor battery
.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car and remove the cover,
see page 272.
6. Connect the red jump lead to the battery's
positive terminal
.
7. Connect one end of the black jump lead to
the donor battery's negative terminal
.
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing
point, (right-hand engine mounting at the
top, the outer screw head)
. Check that
the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so
that there are no sparks during the starting
procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the
engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle (1500 rpm).
10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-
tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur-
ing the start procedure. There is a risk of
sparks forming.
11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and
then the red.
Make sure that none of the clamps on the
black jump lead comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas,
which is highly explosive. One spark, which
can be generated if you connect a jump lead
incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery
explode. The battery contains sulphuric
acid, which can cause serious burns. If the
acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or
clothing, flush with large quantities of water.
If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical
attention immediately.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
112
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual gearbox
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Start from neutral position N and only
engage reverse gear R when the car is sta-
tionary.
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic*
G021350
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear
positions.
The information display shows the position of
the gear selector using the following indica-
tions:
P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4 5 or 6, see
page 69.
Gear positions
Parking position (P)
Select P when starting the engine or when the
car is parked. The brake pedal must be
depressed to disengage the gear selector from
the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged. Activate the electric
parking brake by pressing the button, see
page 122.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
Reverse (R)
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
Neutral position (N)
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in position N.
Drive (D)
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
``
113
Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever to the side from position D to the end
position at +/. The information display shifts
the indication from
D to one of the figures 1
6, which is equivalent to the gear that is
engaged just then, see page 69.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)
to change up a gear and release the lever,
which returns to its rest position between
+ and .
or
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode (+/) can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Move the lever to the side to the end posi-
tion at D.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after
the lever has been moved forwards or back-
wards in its (-+/) position. The information
display then shifts the indication from
S to
show which of the gears
1-6 is engaged.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)
1
The Sport programme provides sportier cha-
racteristics and allows higher engine speed for
the gears. At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to
a delayed upshift.
Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to
the side from D position to the end position at
+/. The information display shifts the indica-
tion from
D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear lever from the D position to the end
position at +/ - the instrument panel dis-
play shifts the indication from
D to the fig-
ure
1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards + (plus) twice - the display
shifts the indication from
1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-
tion.
1
Only models D5 and T6.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
114
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed – the original
gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G021351
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-
tems:
Keylock
To remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the
P position. The remote control key is locked in
all other positions.
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-
ing the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 74.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 74.
Deactivating the automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved from
the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and open the
hatch.
Fully insert the key blade. Press the key
blade down and hold (For information on
the key blade, see page 47.)
Move the gear selector from the P position.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
Automatic gearbox, Powershift*
2
G021350
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear
positions.
Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox
that has double mechanical clutch discs in
contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox.
A conventional automatic gearbox has a
hydraulic torque converter that transfers power
from the engine to the gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the same
way and has similar controls and functions as
the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri-
bed in the previous section.
HSA
The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that
the pressure in the brake system remains for
several seconds while the foot is moved from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before
setting off or reversing uphill.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver acceler-
ates.
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overload
protection that is activated if it becomes too
hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the
accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a
long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu-
minates and the information display shows a
message. The transmission can also overheat
during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or
slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer
hitched. The transmission cools down when
the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed
and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can
be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car
and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until
there is a moderate distance to the traffic
ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then
wait another moment with your foot on the
brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary
on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car
with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox
could then overheat.
Text message and action
In some situations the display may show a
message at the same time as a symbol is illu-
minated.
2
Only 4-cyl. model 2.0, 2.0T, 2.0F.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
116
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action
Transm. overheat brake to hold
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-
stant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car
stationary using the foot brake.
A
Transm. overheat park safely
Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car
immediately in a safe manner.
A
Transm. cooling let engine run
No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cool-
ing: Run the engine at idling speed with the
gear lever in the N or P position until the
message clears.
A
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the transmission
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's elec-
tronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that
the car is defective but instead show that a
safety function has been activated inten-
tionally to prevent damage to one of the
car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text
Transm. overheat park safely is ignored
then the heat in the gearbox may become
so high that the power transmission
between engine and gearbox is temporarily
halted in order to prevent the clutch from
malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and
is stationary until gearbox temperature has
cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 134.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk READ button.
03 Your driving environment
All-wheel drive – AWD*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
117
All Wheel Drive is always available
All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all
four wheels at the same time.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An elec-
tronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best grip
on the current road surface. This provides the
best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under
normal driving conditions, the majority of
power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
118
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level
and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched
off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force
must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used
if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see page 300.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System) which prevents the wheels
from locking during braking. This means the
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal when this is
engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto-
matically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 40 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the brake
pedal.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of sudden braking.
After the car's speed has been slowed below
10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to
the normal constant glow - while at the same
time the hazard warning flashers are activated,
and they flash until the driver changes engine
speed with the accelerator pedal or they are
deactivated with their button, see page 85.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay
is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur-
faces, prior to long-stay parking and after the
car has been washed. Carry this out by braking
gently during a short period while en route.
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase brake force and
so reduce braking distance. EBA detects the
driver's braking style and increases brake force
as necessary. The brake force can be rein-
forced up to the level when the ABS system is
engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when
the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
119
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol Specification
Constant glow – Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started –
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-
tem.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor-
mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near-
est workshop and have the brake system
checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
03
120
General
1
HDC can be compared to an automatic engine
brake. When you release the accelerator on
downhill gradients the car is normally braked
by means of the engine striving for low engine
idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But
the steeper the road and the more load there is
in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine
braking. In order to then reduce speed the
driver has to assist using the footbrake.
The function makes it possible to increase/
reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with
a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without
using the footbrake. The sensitivity of the
accelerator pedal decreases and becomes
more precise by means of the full actuation of
the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine
speed within a limited range. The brake system
brakes itself and provides the car with a low
and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully
focus on steering.
HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients
with an uneven road surface and slippery sec-
tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer
from a ramp.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations, but is
instead only intended to be supplementary
assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
that the car is driven safely.
Function
HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch
on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the
button illuminates when the function is
switched on. When HDC is operating the
symbol illuminates and the display
shows
Hill descent control ON.
The function only operates in first gear position
and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox,
gear position 1 must be selected, which is
shown with the figure
1 in the trip computer
display, see page 113.
NOTE
HDC cannot be activated in an automatic
gearbox with the gear selector in position
D.
Operation
HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of
10 km/h forwards with engine braking and
7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within
the gear's speed register can be selected using
the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator
pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to
10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the
hill's gradient and without the need for the foot-
brake.
The brake lights come on automatically when
the function is operating. The driver can brake
or stop the car at any time by using the foot-
brake.
HDC is deactivated:
1
HDC is only available on the XC70.
03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
03
121
with the on/off button on the centre con-
sole
if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a
manual gearbox
if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an
automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector
is moved to position D.
The function can be disengaged at any time. If
it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then
the braking effect will not release directly, but
slowly instead.
NOTE
With HDC activated you may experience a
delay between acceleration pedal activation
and engine response.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
122
Parking brake, electric
Function
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the parking brake is being applied. The noise
can also be heard during the automatic func-
tion checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes over
to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta-
tionary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see page 111.
Applying the parking brake
Parking brake control.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Press the control.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
The symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel flashes until the parking
brake is fully applied. When the symbol illumi-
nates the parking brake is applied.
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is moving by depress-
ing the control. When the control is released or
the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking
is interrupted.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at speeds
above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the
braking procedure.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels
away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the
wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the
parking brake when parking on a slope -
leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has auto-
matic transmission, is not sufficient to hold
the car in all situation.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
``
123
Disengaging the parking brake
Parking brake control.
Cars with manual gearbox
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Pull the control.
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released
manually by depressing the clutch pedal
instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom-
mends the use of the brake pedal.
Releasing automatically
1. Start the engine.
2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel-
erator.
Cars with automatic gearbox
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Pull the control.
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the engine.
3.
Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only
released automatically if the engine is run-
ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The
parking brake is released immediately on
cars with automatic gearbox when the
accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear
selector is in position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-
ing off. Release the control when the engine
achieves traction.
Cars with Keyless drive function
Release manually by pressing the
START/STOP ENGINE button, then depress
the brake or clutch pedal and pull the control.
Symbols
Symbol Specification
Read the message on the infor-
mation display
A flashing symbol indicates that
the parking brake is applied. If
the symbol flashes in any other
situation then this means that a
fault has arisen. Read the mes-
sage on the information display.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
124
Messages
Park brake not fully released - A fault is pre-
venting the parking brake from being released.
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended. A warning signal
sounds if you pull away with this error mes-
sage.
Parking brake not applied - A fault is pre-
venting the parking brake from being applied.
Try to apply and release. Visit a workshop if the
message remains - a Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with
manual gearbox when the car is driven at low
speed with the door open in order to alert the
driver that the parking brake may have been
unintentionally disengaged.
Parking brake Service required - A fault has
arisen. Visit a workshop if the fault persists - a
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before the fault has
been rectified then the wheels must be turned
as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged
(manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be
in position P (automatic gearbox).
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric
parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink
*
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
125
General
HomeLink
is a programmable remote control
which can control up to three different devices
(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-
ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so
replace their remote controls. HomeLink
is
supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
The HomeLink
panel consists of three pro-
grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.
NOTE
HomeLink
is designed not to work if the car
is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when switching to
another car).
Delete the button programming when the
car is to be sold.
Metallic sun visors should not be used in
cars fitted with HomeLink
. This may have
an adverse effect on its function.
Operation
When HomeLink
is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button to activate
the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi-
cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but-
ton is kept depressed.
NOTE
If the ignition is not activated, HomeLink
will work for 30 minutes after the driver's
door has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course be
used in parallel with HomeLink
.
WARNING
If HomeLink
is used to operate a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the
vicinity of the door or gate while it is in
motion.
Do not use the HomeLink
remote control
for any garage door that does not have
safety stop and safety reverse. The garage
door must react immediately when it
detects that something is preventing its
movement, and stop directly and reverse. A
garage door without these characteristics
could cause personal injury. For further
information - contact the supplier via the
Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time
The first step erases the memory in
HomeLink
and must not be carried out when
only one individual button is being reprogram-
med.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-
ing indicates that HomeLink
is set in
"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-
grammed.
2. Position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLink
. Monitor the indi-
cator lamp.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink
*
03
126
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink
depends on the programming
of the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button for the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLink
simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flash-
ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink
and
watching the indicator lamp:
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-
minates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLink
button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "roll-
ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-
ilar is not activated when the pro-
grammed HomeLink
button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
5.
Locate the "programming button
1
" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink
, while the "programming but-
ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual button, proceed in
accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on
HomeLink
and do not release until step 3
has been completed.
2.
When the indicator lamp on HomeLink
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLink
. Monitor the indi-
cator lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote
control. The indicator lamp will start to
flash. When the flashing has changed over
from a slow to a rapid flashing - release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
1
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink
*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
127
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-
minates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLink
button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "roll-
ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-
ilar is not activated when the pro-
grammed HomeLink
button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
5.
Locate the "programming button
2
" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink
, while the "programming but-
ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Erasing programming
It is only possible to erase the programming for
all the buttons on HomeLink
, not for individual
buttons.
±
Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds.
>
HomeLink
is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-
grammed once more, see page 125.
2
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
128
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Menus and messages........................................................................... 130
Climate control...................................................................................... 137
Fuel-driven engine block heater
and passenger compartment heater*................................................... 144
Additional heater*.................................................................................. 147
Audio system........................................................................................ 148
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen* ....................... 161
Trip computer........................................................................................ 166
DSTC – Stability and traction control system....................................... 168
Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 170
Cruise control*...................................................................................... 171
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 173
Distance Alert*...................................................................................... 181
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...................................................... 184
Driver Alert System – DAC*................................................................... 190
Driver Alert System - LDW*................................................................... 193
Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 196
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................ 199
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 202
Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 205
Built-in phone*...................................................................................... 210
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
130
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Some of the car's functions do not have sep-
arate function keys, but instead can be
adjusted/activated/deactivated via a menu
system.
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
some of the centre console buttons or with the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Many functions are standard, some are
optional. The range varies depending on mar-
ket.
Centre console controls
Centre console with information display and con-
trols for menus.
Numerical keypad 1–9
Navigation button – scrolls and selects
among menu options
MENU – leads to the menu system
EXIT – leads back one step in the menu
structure. A long press leads out from the
menu system.
ENTER – selects menu options
Steering wheel keypad*
ENTER
EXIT
Navigation buttons – up/down.
If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and
EXIT then these buttons, and the navigation
buttons, have the same functions as the con-
trols in the centre console.
Search paths
Current menu level is shown at the top right of
the centre console display. Search paths to the
menu system functions are described in this
manual in the following form:
Car settings
Lock settings
The following is an example of how a function
can be accessed and adjusted using the centre
console buttons:
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to the desired menu, e.g.
Car
settings
, with the navigation buttons and
press ENTER - a submenu opens.
3.
Scroll to
Lock settings and press
ENTER - a new submenu opens.
4.
Scroll to
Doors unlock and press
ENTER - a submenu of selectable func-
tions opens.
5. Choose between the options and press
ENTER - a cross is marked in the option's
empty box.
6. Exit the programming by backing out of the
menus incrementally with short presses on
EXIT or with one long press.
The navigation buttons can be used instead of
ENTER and EXIT when navigating in the menu
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
131
hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to
ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT.
The menu options are numbered and can also
be selected directly with the numerical keypad
(only 1–9).
Menu overview
The phone and audio sources each have sep-
arate main menus. An audio source main menu
(e.g. CD) can only be accessed when that par-
ticular audio source is active, see page 149.
The following menu options are included in
Main menu:
Car Key memory
Seat & mirror positions*
Car settings
Information
Light settings
Lock settings
Reduced guard
1
Tyre pressure *
Side mirror settings *
Collision warning settings *
Parking camera settings *
Lane departure warning *
Steering force level *
Unit settings
Driver Alert on
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
Recirculation timer
Auto. rear defroster
Seat heating time limit.
Seat heating off during starting
Reset climate settings
Main menu AM
Audio settings
Sound stage
Equalizer front
Equalizer rear
Auto. volume control
Reset all audio settings
Main menu FM
FM settings
News
TP (Traffic information)
Radio text
PTY (Program type)
Advanced radio settings
Audio settings
2
Main menu DAB *
3
Main menu CD
Random
Off
Folder
4
Disc
4
Single disc
5
All discs
5
CD settings
Track information *
1
Available in certain models.
2
For submenus, see "Main menu AM/Audio settings".
3
See page 158 .
4
Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files.
5
Only in systems with CD changer.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
132
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings
2
Main menu AUX
AUX input volume
Audio settings
2
Main menu USB
USB settings
Track information
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings
2
Main menu iPod
iPod settings
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings
2
Track information
Main menu, Bluetooth
6
Call register
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Phone book
Search
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth *
Change phone
7
Connect phone
8
Remove phone
Connect fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth info. for the car
Call options
Automatic answer
Voice mail number
Phone settings
Sounds and volume
Synchronise phone book
Main menu, Bluetooth
9
Call register
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Phone book
Search
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth *
Connect phone
10
Remove phone
Connect fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth info. for the car
Call options
Automatic answer
2
For submenus, see "Main menu AM/Audio settings".
6
Applies to cars that do not have built-in phone.
7
Only shown if a phone is connected.
8
Only shown if no phone is connected.
9
Applies to cars with built-in phone and Bluetooth
TM
handsfree.
10
Only shown if no phone is connected.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
``
133
Voice mail number
Change phone
Car phone
Add phone
Added phones
11
Phone settings
Sounds and volume
Synchronise phone book
Main menu, built-in phone
Call register
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Erase list
Call duration
Phone book
Search
New contact
Copy all
Speed-dial
Erase SIM
Erase phone
Memory status
Messages
Read
Write new
Delete all messages
Message settings
Call options
Send my number
Call waiting
Automatic answer
Auto redial
Voice mail number
Diversions
Change phone
9
Car phone
Add phone
Added phones
11
Phone settings
Network selection
SIM security
Edit PIN code
Sounds and volume
IDIS
Reset Phone settings
11
A maximum of 5 phones.
9
Applies to cars with built-in phone and Bluetooth
TM
handsfree.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
134
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Combined instrument panel
Information display and controls for menus.
READ – access to message list and mes-
sage confirmation.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
The menus shown on the information displays
in the combined instrument panel are con-
trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The
menus shown depend on key position, see
page 74. If a message appears then this must
be acknowledged with READ for the menus to
be shown.
Menu overview
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
To empty fuel tank
Average
Instantaneous
Average speed
DSTC
Current speed
12
Tyre pressure Calibration *
Park heat timer 1/2
13
*
Park vent timer 1/2*
Park timer mode*
Direct start Park heat*
Direct start Park el.heat*
Direct start Park vent*
Additional heat auto*
Rest heat start*
Message
Text message in the information display.
When a warning, information or indicator sym-
bol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears on the information display. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault is rectified.
Press READ to acknowledge and browse
between the messages.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press READ) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
12
Only certain markets.
13
Can only be set when the engine is switched off.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
``
135
Message Specification
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Stop engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Service urgent
A
Volvo recommends that
you engage an author-
ised Volvo workshop to
check the car immedi-
ately.
Service
required
A
Volvo recommends that
you engage an author-
ised Volvo workshop to
check the car as soon
as possible.
See manual
A
Read the owner's man-
ual.
Message Specification
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular
service. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular service.
Volvo recommends that
you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
The timing is deter-
mined by the number of
kilometres driven, num-
ber of months since the
last service, engine run-
ning time and oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals
are not followed then
the warranty does not
cover any damaged
parts. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact
an authorised Volvo
workshop for service.
Message Specification
Transmission
oil Change nee-
ded
Volvo recommends that
you engage an author-
ised Volvo workshop to
check the car as soon
as possible.
Transmission
performance
low
The gearbox cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive carefully until the
message clears
B
.
If shown repeatedly:
Volvo recommends that
you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clears
B
.
Transmission
hot Stop safely
Critical fault. Stop the
car immediately in a
safe manner. Volvo rec-
ommends that you con-
tact an authorised
Volvo workshop
B
.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
136
Message Specification
Temporarily
OFF
A
A function has been
temporarily switched
off and is reset auto-
matically while driving
or after starting again.
Low battery
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the bat-
tery.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on where
the problem has arisen.
B
For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 115.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
137
General
Air conditioning
The car is equipped with Electronic Climate
Control (ECC). The climate control system
cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in
the passenger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning system (AC) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
climate comfort in the passenger compart-
ment and to prevent the windows from mist-
ing, it should always be on.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
etc. in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor* which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand air vents despite the controls
being set for the same temperature on both
sides.
Sensor location
The sun sensor* is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-
rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-
mally, the side windows, and sunroof if appro-
priate, should be closed.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win-
dows clean and use window cleaner.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full
acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the
air conditioning can be temporarily switched
off. There may then be a temporary increase in
temperature in the passenger compartment.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
system air intake (the grille between the bonnet
and the windscreen).
Fault tracing and repair
Engage a workshop that has authorisation for
the fault tracing and repair of the climate con-
trol system. Volvo recommends that you con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Refrigerant
The climate control system contains the refrig-
erant R134a, see page 302. This refrigerant
contains no chlorine, which means that it is
harmless to the ozone layer. Engage a work-
shop that has authorisation for filling/changing
refrigerant to carry out the work. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows
simultaneously and can be used for example to
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
138
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
quickly air the car during hot weather, see
page 56.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart-
ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it may be
necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-
partment filter. Make sure that the correct
filter is fitted.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
This option keeps the passenger compartment
clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances. For more information on CZIP, see the
brochure included with the purchase of the car.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air. The
function starts when required and is dis-
engaged automatically after a time or when
one of the passenger compartment doors
is opened. The amount of time the fan runs
is reduced gradually due to reduced need
up until the car is 4 years old.
The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto-
matic system that cleans the air in the pas-
senger compartment from contaminants
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous
oxides and ground-level ozone.
NOTE
In cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be
changed after 15 000 km or once per year
depending on whichever occurs first. How-
ever, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars
without CZIP the IAQS filter must be
changed at the normal service.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
The materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and they contribute to making
the passenger compartment easier to keep
clean. The carpets in both the passenger com-
partment and the cargo area are removable
and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo, see page 283.
Menu settings
It is possible to change the default settings for
three of the climate control system's functions
via the centre console, see page 130:
Fan speed in automatic mode*, see
page 141.
Recirculation timer for passenger com-
partment air, see page 142.
Automatic rear window defrosting, see
page 98.
All climate control system functions are set to
original position with
RESET via the display.
Air distribution
G017699
The incoming air is divided between
20 different vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
139
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see
page 143.
Air vents in the dashboard
G021367
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
A certain air flow always comes from the vents
in order to maintain a good climate in the pas-
senger compartment.
Air vents in the door pillars
G021368
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-
ing.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment
to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear
seat.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen-
sitive to air flows and draughts.
Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC
Ventilated front seats*, left-hand side
Fan
Heated front seats, left-hand side
Air distribution
Heated front seats, right-hand side
AUTO
Ventilated front seats*, right-hand side
Temperature control, right-hand side
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 98.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
140
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Max. defroster
Recirculation/Air quality system
Temperature control, left-hand side
Operation
Ventilated front seats*
Ventilated front seats can only
be specified when ECC is
installed in the car. The venti-
lation system consists of fans
in the seats and backrests
that draw air through the seat
upholstery. The cooling effect
increases the cooler the passenger compart-
ment air becomes.
The ventilation is regulated from the climate
control and takes seat temperature, solar radi-
ation and outside temperature into considera-
tion.
The ventilation can be used at the same time
as seat heating. For example, the function can
be used to dry damp from clothing.
The ventilation system can be activated when
the engine is running. There are three comfort
levels that produce different cooling and dehu-
midification outputs:
Comfort level III: press the button once for
maximum output – three lamps illuminate.
Comfort level II: press the button twice for
lower output – two lamps illuminate.
Comfort level I: press the button three
times for the lowest output – one lamp illu-
minates.
Press the button four times to switch off the
function – no lamps illuminate.
NOTE
The seat ventilation should be used carefully
by people sensitive to draughts. Comfort
level I is recommended for long-term use.
IMPORTANT
The seat ventilation cannot be started when
passenger compartment temperature is
below 5 °C. This is to avoid chilling anyone
sitting in the seat.
Fan
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
NOTE
If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi-
tioning is not engaged which may result in a
risk of misting windows.
Heated seats
Front seats
Press the button once for the
highest heat level – three
lamps illuminate.
Press the button twice for a
lower heat level – two lamps
illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one lamp illuminates.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat – no lamps illuminate.
The heating is normally switched off at start up.
If the heating has been switched on then it is
switched off automatically when the engine is
switched off. Automatic start of heating can be
activated/deactivated in the menu under:
Climate settings
Seat heating off during
starting
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
``
141
Seat heating is switched off automatically after
a while. The function can be deactivated/acti-
vated in the menu under: Climate settings
Seat heating time limit.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 130.
WARNING
The heated seat should not be used by peo-
ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera-
ture increase because of sensory loss or for
any reason have difficulty in managing to
use the control of the heated seat. Other-
wise, burn injuries may arise.
Air distribution
The figure consists of three
buttons. When the buttons
are pressed a lamp in front of
the respective part of the fig-
ure illuminates and shows
which air distribution is
selected, see page 143.
Auto
The Auto function automati-
cally regulates temperature,
air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation, and air distribu-
tion.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled auto-
matically. The air quality sensor is engaged and
all manual settings are switched off when
AUTO is pressed. The display shows
AUTO
CLIMATE
.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set up
under the menu: Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust. Choose between
Low, Normal or High:
Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
Normal - Automatic fan control.
High - Automatic fan control. A more
intense airflow is prioritised.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 130.
Temperature control
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
When the car is started, the
most recent setting is
resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.
AC – Air conditioning on/off
ON: The air conditioning is
controlled by the system's
Auto function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: When the defroster
function is activated the air conditioning is
switched on automatically (can be switched off
using the AC button).
Defroster
Used to quickly remove mist-
ing and ice from the wind-
screen and side windows. Air
flowing to the windows. The
light in the defroster button
illuminates when the function
is active.
The following also takes place in order to pro-
vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-
ger compartment:
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
142
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
recirculation and the air quality system are
automatically disengaged.
The air conditioning can be disengaged man-
ually using the AC button. When the defroster
function is switched off the climate control sys-
tem returns to the previous settings.
Recirculation/Air quality system
Recirculation
When recirculation is
engaged the right-hand
orange light in the button illu-
minates. The function is
selected to shut out bad air,
exhaust gases etc. from the
passenger compartment. The
air in the passenger compartment is recircula-
ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when
this function is activated.
NOTE
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out-
side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function under Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the
menu system, see page 130.
NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is
always deactivated.
Air quality system*
The air quality system sepa-
rates gases and particles to
reduce the levels of odours
and pollution in the passenger
compartment. If the outside
air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air
is recirculated. When the AUTO button is
depressed the air quality sensor is always
engaged.
Activating recirculation/air quality
sensor
Switch between the three
functions by pressing the but-
ton repeatedly.
The left-hand orange lamp illuminates – the
air quality sensor is disengaged. There is
no recirculation, only fresh air.
The centre green lamp illuminates – recir-
culation not engaged, providing it is not
required for cooling in hot weather.
The right-hand orange lamp illuminates –
recirculation is engaged.
NOTE
The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air in the
passenger compartment.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
If the insides of the windows start misting
up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen, the
side and the rear windows should also be
used to demist the windows.
Activating recirculation
Switch between recirculation
On/Off by pressing the button
repeatedly. The lamp illumi-
nates when recirculation is
engaged.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
143
Air distribution table
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
The air is not recirculated.
Air conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and misting
quickly.
Air to the floor and win-
dows. Some air flows
from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen and
side windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
to prevent misting and
icing in a cold and humid
climate, (not at too low fan
speed to enable this).
Air to floor and from dash-
board air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside tempera-
tures.
Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in
warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows
to the dashboard air vents
and windows.
to direct heat or cold to
the floor
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling
in warm weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and
to the floor.
to provide cooler air along
the floor or warmer air
higher up in cold weather
or hot, dry weather.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
144
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuel-driven heater
General information about the parking
heater
The parking heater heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-
tem calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-
ture exceeds 15 °C. At -5 °C or lower the maxi-
mum running time of the parking heater is 50
minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking
heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may
be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous-
ing, which is perfectly normal.
Refuelling
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Check the information display to see that
the parking heater is switched off. When it
is running, the information display shows
Park heat ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater is switched
off automatically and a message appears on
the information display. Acknowledge the mes-
sage by pressing once on the indicator stalk
READ button, see page 145.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com-
bined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace
the energy consumed by the heater when it
is used on a regular basis.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
145
Operation
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
For more information on the information dis-
play and READ, see page 134.
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
Direct start is activated, the infor-
mation symbol in the combined instrument
panel illuminates while the information display
shows an explanatory text and a further illumi-
nated symbol. The table shows symbols and
display texts that appear.
Sym-
bol
Display Specification
G02510
2
Fuel
heater
ON
The heater is
switched on and
running.
G02510
2
Timer is
set for
Fuel
heater
The heater's timer
is activated after
the remote control
key has been
removed from the
ignition switch and
leaving the car -
the engine and
passenger com-
partment are
heated at the set
time.
G02510
2
Heater
stopped
Low bat-
tery
The heater has
been stopped by
the car's electron-
ics in order to facil-
itate starting the
engine.
Sym-
bol
Display Specification
G02510
2
Heater
unavail.
Low fuel
level
Setting the heater
is not possible due
to fuel level being
too low
(approx. 7 litres) -
this is in order to
facilitate starting
the engine as well
as approx. 50 km
driving.
G02510
2
Park
heater
Service
required
Heater not work-
ing. Contact a
workshop for
repair. Volvo rec-
ommends that you
contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop.
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk
READ button.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
146
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Direct start and immediate stop
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Direct start
Park heat
.
2.
Press RESET to select between
ON and
OFF.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or
with programmed timer.
OFF: Parking heater switched off.
With the direct start of the heater it will be acti-
vated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between
TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
NOTE
The timer can only be programmed when
the remote control key is in key position I,
see page 74 - programming must therefore
be carried out before starting the engine.
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Park heat
timer 1
.
2.
Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing hours setting.
3. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
4.
Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
6.
Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7.
Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting
Park heat timer 1 a second start
time can be programmed with
Park heat timer
2
by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
Park heat timer 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-
ceed as follows:
1.
Press READ.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
Park heat timer 1 or 2.
>
The text
ON flashes on the display.
3.
Press RESET.
>
The text
OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop", see
page 146.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
147
General information about the
additional heater
In cold climate zones
1
an additional heater may
be required to obtain the correct operating
temperature in the engine and to obtain suffi-
cient heating in the passenger compartment.
Fuel-driven additional heater
A fuel-driven additional heater is fitted in cars
with diesel engines.
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
housing which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater can be switched off for
short distances if required.
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Additional
heat auto
.
2.
Press RESET to select between
ON and
OFF.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with
timer function then it can be used as a fuel-
driven passenger compartment heater, see
page 144.
Electric additional heater
Cars with certain petrol engines
2
have an elec-
tric additional heater integrated into the car's
climate control system.
In a semi-cold
1
climate zone diesel-driven cars
have an electric additional heater instead of a
fuel-driven version.
The heater cannot be controlled manually but
is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside tempera-
tures below 14 °C and is switched off after the
set passenger compartment temperature has
been reached.
1
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
2
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
148
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The audio system can be equipped with differ-
ent options and is one of the following three
basic versions:
Performance
High Performance
Premium Sound
The system version is shown in the display
when the audio system is started.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby
symbol
are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Remote control key and key positions
The audio system can be used without the
remote control key in the ignition switch for
15 minutes at a time.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch if the audio system is used
when the engine is switched off. This is to
avoid discharging the battery unnecessar-
ily.
If the audio system is active when the engine is
switched off then it is activated automatically
next time the engine is started.
Overview
Input for external audio source; AUX and
USB* (e.g. iPod
1
)
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console control panel
Control panel with headphones socket*
Steering wheel keypad*
Confirm selection in menu system, accept
phone call.
Lead up in menu system. Interrupt current
function, end/refuse phone calls, clear
entered characters.
Volume
A short press scrolls between CD tracks or
preset radio stations. A long press fast-
winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa-
ble radio station.
1
The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
149
Rear control panel with headphones
socket*
Headphones with an impedance of
16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher
are recommended for best sound reproduc-
tion.
VOLUME – Volume, left and right.
Scroll/search forward and backward.
MODE - Select between AM, FM, CD,
AUX, USB*(e.g. iPod), DAB1/DAB2* and
On/Off. For connection via AUX or USB,
see page 151.
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm).
Activating/deactivating
The control panel is activated with MODE.
Deactivation is possible via a long press on
MODE or when the engine is switched off.
Scroll/search forward and backward
Short presses on (2) are used to scroll between
CD tracks or preset radio stations. A long press
fast-winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa-
ble radio station.
Limitations
The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played
back in the speakers cannot be controlled
from the rear control panel.
Audio functions
Centre console, controls for audio functions.
AM, FM and CD, internal audio sources
MODE - Scroll between external audio
sources (AUX, USB* and DAB1/DAB2*).
For connection via AUX or USB, see
page 151.
SOUND - Pushbutton and knob controls
for adjusting the sound pattern
Navigation button
VOLUME - Volume and On/Off
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume with the speed of the
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
150
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
car. The level of compensation can be set at
low, medium or high. Select the level under
Audio settings
Auto. volume control.
External audio source audio volume
The AUX input can be used for connecting an
MP3 player which has no USB connection for
example, see page 151.
NOTE
The audio quality may be impaired if the
player is charged while the audio system is
in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging
the player via the 12 V socket.
1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using
the MODE button, press MENU and navi-
gate with (4) to
AUX input volume, see
page 148.
2.
Turn the SOUND control or press
/
the navigation button, see page 148.
Audio controls
Press the control SOUND repeatedly to
browse among the following listed options.
Adjustment is made by turning the control.
NOTE
Press MENU to access the audio settings.
For more information, see page 130.
Bass - Bass level.
Treble - Treble level.
Fader – Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
Balance – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
Subwoofer* - Bass speaker level. Turning
the control
anticlockwise to Min deac-
tivates the Subwoofer. The Subwoofer is
located as illustrated below.
G019419
Subwoofer location.
Surround* – Surround settings.
Under
Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby
Surround Pro Logic II can be activated by
selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena-
bles the following options:
Centre level* – Level for centre speaker.
Surround level* – Level for surround.
Equalizer
The equalizer
2
can be used to adjust different
frequency bands separately.
1.
Go to
Audio settings and select
Equalizer front or Equalizer rear.
The sound level for the wavelength is
adjusted with
/ on the navigation
button. Press
/ to select another
wavelength.
2.
Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.
Sound stage
The sound experience can be optimised for the
driver's seat*, both front seats or the rear seat.
Select one of the options under
Audio settings
Sound stage.
2
Only High Performance and Premium Sound.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-
ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g.
Bass, Treble and
Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be
able to adapt the sound reproduction accord-
ing to personal taste.
AUX, USB
3
and external audio source
General
An external audio source can be connected to the
car's infotainment system via the USB connec-
tion* or AUX input in the centre console.
The AUX input enables the connection of an
external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3
player. Read more on page 150
If you choose to connect an iPod, MP3 player
or a USB memory stick to the USB connec-
tion* then you can control the audio source
using the car's audio controls.
Select the connection using the MODE button:
1.
If
USB is selected then Connect device is
shown in the display.
2.
Connect your iPod, MP3 player or USB
memory stick to the USB connection* in
the centre console's storage compartment
(see preceding illustration).
The text
Loading is shown in the display when
the system is loading the storage media's file
structure. This may take some time.
Once loading is complete, track information is
shown on the display and the desired track can
be selected.
A track can be selected in three ways:
With the TUNING control, , see page 148.
the navigation control's (4) right or left-
hand button or, , see page 148.
the steering wheel keypad (see page 148).
In USB or iPod mode the audio system oper-
ates in an equivalent way to the CD player for
playing back music files. For more information,
see page 153.
3
Only High Performance and Premium Sound.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
152
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music
files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats.
However, there are variants of these file for-
mats that are not supported by the system.
The system also supports most iPod
mod-
els produced in 2005 or later. iPod
Shuffle
is not supported.
USB connection* and RSE *
If the car is equipped with RSE* then the USB
connection* is located in accordance with the
above illustration.
Audio sources
USB memory
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer
for the system to load storage media that con-
tains anything other than compatible music
files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media
which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the
FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi-
mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The
memory must have a capacity of at least 256
Mb.
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory
stick the use of the enclosed USB adapter
cable is recommended. This is to avoid
mechanical wear to the USB input and the
connected USB memory stick.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in
USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device
mode.
iPod
An iPod is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection* via the player's con-
nection cable. However, if the player's battery
is fully discharged then it must be charged
before being connected.
NOTE
When an iPod
is used as audio source, the
car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod
player's
own menu structure.
For information on USB and iPod in combi-
nation with Performance audio, see the acces-
sory manual for USB andiPod Music
Interface.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
CD functions
Centre console, controls for CD functions.
CD eject
CD insert and eject slot
Navigation button for changing CD tracks
Fast-wind and change CD track
CD changer position selection*
Scan CD
Start playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when CD is
pressed then playback is started automatically.
Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
Start playback (CD changer*)
Start CD playback by pressing the CD button.
If a music CD is in the player when this takes
place then playback is started automatically.
Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
Insert a CD (CD changer*)
1. Select an empty position with the number
buttons 1–6 or
/ on the navigation
button (4).
An empty position is marked on the dis-
play. The text
Insert disc shows that a new
disc can be inserted. The CD changer can
hold up to six CDs.
2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.
Disc eject
A CD will stay in the ejected position for
approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-
inserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-
ton.
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc.
Pause
If the volume is turned down completely, the
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted
when volume is increased.
Audio files
4
The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA
format audio files.
NOTE
Some copy protected audio files may not be
read by the player.
When a CD with audio files is inserted into the
player the disc's file structure is loaded.
Depending on the quality of the disc and the
quantity of information there may be a delay
before playback starts.
Navigation and playback
If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD
player then ENTER leads to the disc's direc-
tory structure. The directory structure is navi-
gated in the same way as the audio system's
menu structure. Audio files have the symbol
and directories have the symbol .
Start audio file playback with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play-
back of the other files in the same directory
4
High Performance and Premium Sound.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
154
continues. Directory change takes place auto-
matically when all files in the current directory
have been played back.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses / on the navigation but-
ton are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio
files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD
tracks/audio files. The steering wheel keypad
can also be used for this purpose. Track
change can also be made by turning
TUNING.
Scan CD
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti-
vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue
playback of the current CD track/audio file.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order.
The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-
led through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random
CD tracks on the current disc.
Different messages appear depending on
which random function has been selected:
RANDOM means that the tracks from only
one music CD are played
RND ALL means that all tracks on all
music CDs in the CD changer are played.
RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio
files in a directory on the current CD are
played.
CD player
If a normal music CD is being played, activate/
deactivate under
Random.
If a disc with audio files is being played, acti-
vate/deactivate under Random
Folder.
CD changer
If a normal music CD is being played under
Random
Single disc or Random All
discs. The option
All discs only applies to the
music CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/
deactivate instead under Random
Folder.
If you select another CD the function is deac-
tivated.
Track information
If track information is stored on a music CD
then it can be shown on the display. This also
applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium
Sound and High Performance. Activate/deac-
tivate in CD mode under CD settings
Track
information.
Radio functions
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
Navigation button for tuning, automatic
Cancel function in progress
Tuning, manual
Scan wavelength
Preset storage, automatic
Preset buttons and preset storage, manual
Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and
FM2)
Tuning, automatic
1.
Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2.
Press
/ on the navigation button.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
``
155
Tuning, manual
1.
Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2.
Turn TUNING.
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wave-
length. FM has 2 memories for presets:
FM1
and FM2. The stored presets are selected
using the preset buttons.
Preset storage can be carried out manually or
automatically.
Preset storage, manual
1. Tune into a station.
2. Hold in a station preset button until the
message
Channel stored appears on the
display.
Preset storage, automatic
The function is especially useful in areas where
the radio stations and their frequencies are
unfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations are
stored automatically in a separate memory.
1.
Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2.
Hold in AUTO until
Autostoring appears
on the display.
Once
Autostoring disappears from the dis-
play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-
ues in Auto mode and
Auto appears on the
display. The automatically stored presets can
now be selected using the preset buttons.
Automatic preset storage can be cancelled
using EXIT.
Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam-
ple AUTO or FM.
Returning to Auto mode provides access to the
autostored presets:
1.
Press AUTO.
>
Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button.
Scan wavelength
The function automatically searches the cur-
rent wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec-
onds before scanning is resumed.
1.
Select wavelength using AM or FM.
2.
Press SCAN.
SCAN appears on the display. Close using
SCAN or EXIT.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS
radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans-
mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme type, such as
traffic information or news.
Receives text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality.
If a required programme type is located the
radio can switch stations interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting
transmission is played at a preset volume, see
page 157. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and volume when the set pro-
gramme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (
ALARM!),
traffic information (
TP (Traffic information)),
news (
News), and programme types (PTY
(Program type)
) interrupt one another in order
of priority, where alarm has the highest priority
and programme types has the lowest. For fur-
ther programme interruption settings (
EON
and Regional), see page 157. Press EXIT to
return to the interrupted audio source.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
156
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious acci-
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message
ALARM! appears on the display
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information – TP
This function allows traffic information sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The
TP (Traffic information) symbol
indicates that the function is activated. If the
set station can send traffic information then
appears on the display.
±
Activate/deactivate under FM settings
TP (Traffic information).
TP from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with traffic information
from only the set (current) station or from all
stations.
±
Go to FM settings
Advanced radio
settings
TP Station... to change.
News
This function allows news broadcasts sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The
NEWS symbol indicates that the
function is active.
±
Activate/deactivate under FM settings
News.
News from current/all stations
The radio can interrupt with news from only the
set (current) station or from all stations.
±
Go to FM settings
Advanced radio
settings
News station to change.
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used to select differ-
ent programme types, such as pop music and
serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that
the function is active. This function allows pro-
gramme types broadcast within a set station's
RDS network to break through.
1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro-
gramme type under FM settings
PTY
Select PTY.
2.
Deactivate by clearing the PTY under FM
settings
Clear all PTY.
PTY search
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1.
Select a PTY under FM settings
PTY
Select PTY.
2.
Go to FM settings
PTY (Program type) Search PTY.
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-
gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis-
play.
±
To continue searching for another broad-
cast of the selected programme types,
press
on the navigation button.
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the display.
±
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings
PTY Show PTY
NOTE
Not all radio stations support display of pro-
gramme type.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
tion can be shown on the display.
±
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
Radio text.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
``
157
Automatic frequency update – AF
This function selects one of the strongest
transmitters for a set station. The function may
need to search through the entire FM wave-
length to find a strong transmitter. If this
occurs, the radio mutes and
PI Seek Press
Exit to cancel
appears on the display.
±
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings
Advanced radio settings
AF.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue with
a regional transmitter even if its signal strength
is low. The symbol
REG shows that the func-
tion is active.
±
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings
Advanced radio settings
Regional.
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
This function is useful in urban areas with many
regional radio stations. It allows the distance
between the car and the radio station trans-
mitter to determine when programme functions
should interrupt the current audio source.
±
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-
ing one of the options under FM settings
Advanced radio settings EON:
Local – interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
Distant
5
– interrupts if the station trans-
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
Off – no interruption for programmes from
other transmitters.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
±
The reset is carried out in FM mode under
FM settings
Advanced radio settings
Reset all.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types, e.g.
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected
for each respective programme type. If the vol-
ume level is adjusted during the programme
interruption, the new level is saved until the
next programme interruption.
Menu structure FM
Main menu FM
FM settings
1.1 News
1.2 TP (Traffic information)
1.3 Radio text
1.4 PTY (Program type)
1.4.1 Select PTY
Clear all PTY
Current affairs
Information
Sport
Education
Drama
Culture
Science
Varied speech
Pop music
Rock music
Easy listening
Light classic
5
Factory settings.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
158
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Classical
Other music
Weather & metro
Finance
Children's programs
Social affairs
Religion
Phone in
Travel & touring
Leisure & hobby
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
1.4.2 Search PTY
1.4.3 Show PTY text
1.5 Advanced radio settings
1.5.1 TP station
1.5.2 News station
1.5.3 AF
1.5.4 EON
Off
Local
Distant
1.5.5 Regional
1.5.6 Reset all FM settings
Radio system - DAB*
General
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital
broadcasting system for radio.
NOTE
This system does not support DAB+.
Service and Ensemble
Service - Channel, radio channel (only
audio services are supported by the sys-
tem).
Ensemble - A collection of radio channels
on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-
casting area, programming of existing channel
groups in the area can take place.
Programming of channel groups creates an
updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically. Program-
ming takes place via the
Ensemble learn
menu or directly by means of a long press on
AUTO. If can take up to a minute to program a
channel group if both
Band III and LBand are
selected.
Wavelength
DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths
6
; Band
III
and LBand.
Band III – over the whole country
7
LBand - mainly in large cities
By selecting for example
Band III on its own,
channel programming takes place more
quickly than if both
Band III and LBand are
selected. It is not certain that all channel
groups will be found. Wavelength selection
does not affect the stored memories.
Navigation via lists
There are three types of basic list which can be
used for navigation:
6
Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
7
During a build-up phase DAB will not cover the whole country but will only work in larger urban areas.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
``
159
Ensemble - Shows channel groups that
the receiver has obtained via channel
group programming.
Service - Shows channels irrespective of
the channel group to which they are allo-
cated. The list can also be filtered using
DAB PTY (see below).
Subchannel - Subchannels to a selected
channel.
The lists can be accessed via the menu. The
channel groups can also be accessed by
pressing ENTER.
Scanning
Scanning means that all channels in the list are
played for 10 seconds each.
±
Press
SCAN to activate
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
mode. In which case only channels of the pre-
selected programme type are played.
±
Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, or
by pressing EXIT.
Subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main pro-
gramme into other languages.
If one or more subchannels are broadcast then
the
> symbol is shown to the right of the chan-
nel name in the display. A subchannel is indi-
cated by the
> symbol appearing to the left of
the channel name in the display.
To access a subchannel:
±
Press
.
To navigate between subchannels:
±
Press
or .
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
one without selecting it.
DAB PTY (program type)
DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro-
gramme. There are 29 different programme
types which also include different programme
categories. After selecting a programme type,
navigation only takes place within the channels
broadcasting that type.
Exit this mode as follows:
±
Press EXIT
It is also possible to select a preset channel or
exit
DAB PTY via the menu. In certain cases
DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to
DAB linking (see below) is implemented.
DAB to DAB link
It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another chan-
nel group with better reception. There may be
a certain delay when changing channel group.
There may be a period of silence between the
current channel no longer being available to the
new channel becoming available.
DAB display settings
1.
Basic - Only the channel name is shown if
a primary component is being played. A
subchannel name is shown if it is a sub-
channel being played
2.
Ensemble - Adds the channel group name
to the channel name
3.
Ensemble +PTY - Adds the programme
type name under the channel name
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wave-
length. DAB has 2 memories for presets:
DAB1 and DAB2. The stored presets are
selected using the preset buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no sub-
channels. If a subchannel is being played and
a preset is saved then only the channel ID is
registered. This is because subchannels are
temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the
preset, the channel which contained the sub-
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
160
channel will be played. The preset is not
dependent on the channel list.
A saved channel does not have to be in the
channel list for it to be playable. If the channel
is loaded when it is not available then a preset
number is shown and there is silence until an
available preset is selected for loading. Alter-
natively another channel.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not
support all functions available in the DAB
standard.
Menu structure DAB
Main menu DAB
1. Select ensemble
2. Select service
3. Select subchannel
4. DAB PTY
4.1. DAB PTY off
4.2. News
4.3. Current affairs
4.4. Information
4.5. Sport
4.6. Education
4.7. Drama
4.8. Arts
4.9. Science
4.10. Talk
4.11. Pop music
4.12. Rock music
4.13. Calm music
4.14. Light classic
4.15. Classical music
4.16. Other music
4.17. Weather
4.18. Finance
4.19. Children
4.20. Factual
4.21. Religion
4.22. Phone in
4.23. Travel
4.24. Leisure
4.25. Jazz and blues
4.26. Country music
4.27. National music
4.28. Oldies music
4.29. Folk music
4.30. Documentary
5. Ensemble learn
6. DAB settings
6.1. DAB display settings
6.1.1. Ensemble
name
6.1.2. Ensemble
name and
PTY
6.1.3. Basic
6.2. DAB to DAB link
6.3. FM traffic
6.4. Select DAB band
6.4.1. Band III
6.4.2. LBand
6.4.3. LBand & Band
III
6.5. Reset DAB
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
General
The RSE system can be used at the same time
as the car's infotainment system.
When the rear seat passengers are using DVD,
RSE-AUX or watching TV
1
while listening with
headphones, the driver and front seat passen-
ger can still use the car's radio or CD player.
Power consumption, ignition positions
The system can be activated in ignition position
I or II and while the engine is running. When the
car is being started the film stops temporarily
and continues when the engine has started.
When the system has been used once without
the ignition in position I it is blocked. To restart,
ignition position I must be activated.
NOTE
In the event of extended use (more than 10
minutes) with the engine switched off - the
capacity of the car's battery may decrease
to such a low level that the engine cannot
be started.
In which case a message will appear on the
screen.
TV overview
Press and select TV I DVD I AUX
TV
MEDIA MENU.
Channel lock list
Channel manage-
ment
Channel search Management of
new carriers
Add carrier
Information on fre-
quency
Delete a frequency
Delete all frequen-
cies
Auto scan
System settings TV
Audio mode
Factory default
Time zone setting
CI module No CAM inserted
CI module infor-
mation
Signal strength
System settings TV
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
TV.
Languages
TV menu language
E.g. English
Pict. format 16:9
4:3
Auto
1
TV is an option for the RSE system.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
162
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Mode (screen
mode)
Standard
Zoom
Full screen
Centered
Audio mode Right
Left
Banner timeout
The menus can be
displayed for
between
8-40 seconds.
System settings-Sound mode
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
Audio mode.
The original speech for a TV programme can
be replaced with speech in another language if
the programme is broadcast with several audio
tracks.
Audio Audio - 1, e.g. ENG.
Audio - 2, e.g. GER.
Audio mode Right
Left
Stereo
AC3
System settings-Factory settings
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
Factory default.
The system's factory settings are restored
here.
System settings-Time zone settings
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
Time zone setting.
For local programme times to be displayed
correctly the time zone must be set. The
GUIDE and INFO button menus and the clock
are affected by local time zones.
Pay channels
To watch pay channels a payment card must
be fitted in an adapter which is inserted into the
digital TV box.
G031510
The box is located under the hatch in the cargo
area
1. Open the hatch in the cargo area, the box
is protected by a cover.
2. Open the rubber cover on the box.
3. Fit the payment card into the adapter.
Make sure that it is fitted correctly.
4. Insert the adapter in the digital TV box.
Make sure that it is inserted correctly.
> The system will detect that it has
received new information.
5. Search to find the new channels that have
become available, see the section "Pay-
ment card TV channels" below.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
163
Payment card TV channels
Search so that the system identifies the pay-
ment card's channels.
1.
Press MEDIA MENU on the remote con-
trol.
2.
Select Channel search
Auto scan.
3.
Select country and press
.
Formats supported by the digital TV box
The TV system supports MPEG-2 transmis-
sions. There is the option to receive
MPEG-4 transmissions if you buy an adapter.
This adapter is inserted into the digital TV box
and is fitted in the same way as the adapter for
the payment card. See the section "Pay chan-
nels" above.
Music
Playing back a CD disc
1. Insert the CD with the label side turned
from the buttons.
> The disc starts to play back automati-
cally.
2. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
CH A for left-hand screen or CH B for right-
hand screen.
> The sound is directed to the head-
phones.
3. Adjust the audio volume in the headphones
using the volume control/wheel on the
headphones.
Alternatively - activate the car's audio sys-
tem in MODE-AUX and press
A B
on
the remote control to listen via the speak-
ers.
Selecting within a disc directory
1. Load the disc.
2.
Press
.
3. Scroll using the navigation buttons to
select a file.
4.
Press
to select the subdirectory.
Different playback options
The disc can be played back in different ways,
scroll with the navigation buttons to select
playback option.
When the dialogue box appears:
1. Press the right-hand navigation button to
move over in the right-hand menu.
2. Scroll using the navigation buttons to
select playback options.
3.
Confirm with
.
Change CD track
±
Change CD track with or
fast-wind by holding the buttons
depressed.
Pause
1.
Pause and restart the disc with
.
2.
Stop the disc with
.
3.
Press
again to eject the disc.
Discs copied privately can be used.
However, playback and quality depend on the
quality of the source file, format and disc qual-
ity.
AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V
The input allows you to connect other equip-
ment. Always follow the instructions included
with the external equipment, or from the man-
ufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip-
ment connected via the RSE AUX input can use
the screens, wireless headphones, head-
phones sockets and the car's speakers.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
164
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Connecting the RSE AUX input
G030382
The RSE-AUX input is located under the front arm-
rest.
1. Connect the video cable to the yellow
socket.
2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the
white socket and the right-hand one to the
red socket.
3. Connect the power cable to the power
socket if your equipment is designed for
12 V.
For electrical socket location, see page 204
System
Formats supported by the system.
Audio
format
CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,
MP3, WMA
Video
format
DVD video, VCD, SVCD, DivX/
MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo CD
Kodak, Photo CD JPG
Disc
format
DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,
DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,
CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD
Advanced system settings
These settings can only be accessed when the
DVD player is empty.
±
Press MEDIA MENU.
GENERAL SETUP
ANGLE MARK
CAPTION
AUDIO SETUP
COMPRESSION
DVX(R)
REGISTRATION
PREFERENCES
TV TYPE
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
DEFAULTS
Changing the battery in the remote
control and wireless headphones
The remote control and headphones are pow-
ered by 2 AAA batteries.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery
cover.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and insert
them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
Wireless headphones
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery
cover.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and insert
them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
NOTE
If the system is too hot to be used or if bat-
tery voltage is too low then an information
message appears on the screen.
Environmental care
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries
in an environmentally safe manner.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
04
166
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Information display and controls.
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel – browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list
RESET – resets
The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop.
One of the menu options is a blank display - it
also marks the beginning/end of the loop.
Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must
first be acknowledged before the trip com-
puter can be reactivated. Acknowledge the
warning message by pressing READ.
To change unit for distance and speed - con-
tact a workshop. An authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Average speed
Average speed is calculated from the last
resetting. Reset using RESET.
Instantaneous
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "
----" appears on the display.
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting. Reset using RESET.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven supplementary and/or parking
heater* has been used.
Km to empty tank
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
tank.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance. For more information
on how you can influence fuel consumption,
see page 11.
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "
---- km to empty tank". Refuel as
soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
Resetting
1.
Select
--- km/h average speed or --.- l/
100km average
.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
2.
Press and hold RESET for
approx. 1 second to reset the selected
function. If RESET is kept depressed for at
least 3 three seconds then Average speed
and Average are reset simultaneously.
Current speed*
1
The instrument panel display shows current
speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated
in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in
mph then the current speed is shown in km/h.
1
Only certain markets.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
04
168
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system, DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps
the driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car
may accelerate slower than expected when the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during accel-
eration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans-
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
ning to the one that is not.
Operation
Reduced operation
System operation during skidding and accel-
eration can be reduced. Operation during skid-
ding is delayed and so allows more skidding
which provides greater freedom for dynamic
driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is
improved as traction is no longer limited.
G021409
1.
Turn the thumbwheel (1) until the
DSTC
menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the
system function is unchanged.
DSTC spin control OFF means that sys-
tem operation is reduced.
2.
Press and hold RESET (2) until the
DSTC
menu is changed.
The system will remain reduced until the engine
is switched off - after the engine is started the
next time DSTC is back in its normal mode
again.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics may dete-
riorate if the function is reduced.
Messages in the information display
DSTC Temporarily OFF means that the sys-
tem has been temporarily reduced due to
excessive temperature in the brake discs.
±
The function is reactivated automatically
when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required system disabled due
to a fault.
±
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
> If the message remains when the engine
is restarted, drive to a workshop. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
If the symbols and are shown at
the same time - read the message on the infor-
mation display.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
04
169
If the symbol appears alone then it may
appear as follows:
Flashing light means that the system is
now being activated.
Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys-
tem check when the engine is started.
Constant glow after starting the engine or
while driving means system fault.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
04
170
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Active chassis (Four-C)*
Active chassis, Four-C (Continously Controlled
Chassis Concept), regulates the characteris-
tics of the shock absorbers so that the car's
driving characteristics can be adjusted. There
are three settings: Comfort, Sport and
Advanced.
Comfort
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more comfortable on rough and uneven
road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the
movement of the body is smooth and gentle.
Sport
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more sporty and is recommended for
more active driving. Steering response is faster
than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is
harder and the body follows the road in order
to reduce rolling during cornering.
Advanced
This setting is only recommended on very even
and smooth road surfaces.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-
mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further
minimised.
Operation
Chassis settings.
Use the buttons in the centre console to
change setting. The setting in use when the
engine is switched off is activated next time the
engine is started.
Speed related power steering*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The
steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different
levels of steering force for road responsiveness
or steering sensitivity. Go to Car settings
Steering force level in the menu system and
select
Low, Medium or High.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 131. This menu cannot be accessed
while the car is in motion.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
Operation
G021411
Steering wheel keypad and display.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby
mode)
Activating and setting the speed
Switch on the cruise control with one press on
the steering wheel button CRUISE - the sym-
bol
is illuminated in the display (5) and the
brackets around (---) km/h show that the
cruise control is set in standby mode.
The cruise control is then activated with
or
, after which the current speed is stored in
the memory - the display text
(---) km/h
changes to show the selected speed, e.g. 100
km/h
.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 30 km/h.
Changing the speed
In active mode the speed is adjusted with long
or short presses on
or - the last press is
stored in the memory.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
NOTE
If any cruise control button is held
depressed for more than approx. 1 minute
then cruise control is disengaged. The
engine must be switched off in order to reset
cruise control.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
Press to temporarily disengage the cruise
control and set it in standby mode - set speed
is shown in brackets in the display (5), e.g.
(100) km/h.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
wheels lose traction
the foot brake is used
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the clutch pedal is depressed
the gear selector is moved to neutral posi-
tion (automatic gearbox)
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated
with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with
.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control*
04
172
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button CRUISE or by switching
off the engine - the set speed is deleted from
the memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
General information on ACC
The adaptive cruise control ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead. It provides a
more relaxing driving experience on long jour-
neys on motorways and long straight main
roads in smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed and time
interval to the car in front. When the radar
detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is automatically adapted to that.
When the road is clear again the car returns to
the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or
set to the standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is
warned by Distance Alert (see page 181) about
the short distance.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not
maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis-
tance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The Function section and onwards informs
about limitations of which the driver should
be aware before using the adaptive cruise
control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Function
G021412
Functions overview.
Warning lamp, braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad
Radar sensor
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
control system and a coordinated spacing sys-
tem.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
174
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly
measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control
regulates the speed with acceleration and
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low
sound when they are being used by cruise con-
trol.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the cruise
control brakes. Do not rest your foot under
the brake pedal as it could become trapped.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see
any vehicle in front then the car will instead
maintain the cruise control's set speed. This
also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front
exceeds the cruise control's set speed.
The cruise control aims to control the speed in
a smooth way. In situations that require rapid
braking the driver must brake himself/herself.
This applies with large differences in speed, or
if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to lim-
itations in the radar sensor, braking may come
unexpectedly or not at all, see page 177.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to
follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes
too low, the cruise control is set in standby
mode at which automatic braking ceases - the
driver must then take over himself/herself to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to approximately 25% of the
car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than
cruise control capacity and the driver does not
brake, then the cruise control uses the collision
warning system's warning lamp and warning
sound (see page 184) to alert the driver that
immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to notice
in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are
being worn.
WARNING
Cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. Consequently
there may be no warning or it may be sub-
ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but
brake when it is necessary.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. The cruise control may have dif-
ficultly in keeping the correct distance from the
vehicle ahead when driving on steep roads,
with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which
case, be extra attentive and ready to slow
down.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
175
Operation
Steering wheel keypad and display.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby
mode)
Time interval - On, during adjustment.
Time interval - On, after adjustment.
Activating and setting the speed
Switch on cruise control with one press on the
steering wheel button
- the symbol is
illuminated in the display. The brackets (6) at
(---) mean that cruise control is set in standby
mode.
The cruise control is then activated with
or
, after which the current speed is stored in
the memory - the display text (---) changes to
show the selected speed, e.g.
100 without
brackets.
When the symbol
changes
to
the radar sensor has
detected a vehicle.
Only when the symbol
(with car) is illuminated, is the
distance to the vehicle in front
regulated by the cruise control.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 30 km/h.
Changing the speed
In active mode the speed is adjusted with long
or short presses on
, or . In active
mode the button
has the same function as
but results in a lower increase in speed. The
last press is stored in the memory.
NOTE
If any cruise control button is held
depressed for more than approx. 1 minute
then cruise control is disengaged. The
engine must be switched off in order to reset
cruise control.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. Then the display shows
Cruise control Unavailable, see
page 179.
Set time interval
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
display as 1-5 horizontal lines
- the more lines the longer the
time distance. One line corre-
sponds to approximately
1 second, 5 lines approximately 2.5 seconds.
The time interval is increased using the steering
wheel button
and decreased using .
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in
front smoothly and comfortably.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
176
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Note that a short time interval gives the driver
a short time to react and act if something unex-
pected happens in the traffic.
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds after-
wards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the dis-
play. The same symbol is also shown when
Distance Alert is activated, see page 181.
NOTE
Only use the time interval that is allowed in
accordance with local traffic regulations.
If cruise control does not seem to react to
activation the reason may be that the time
interval to the closest vehicle prevents an
increase in speed.
The higher the speed, the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a specific time
interval.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
Press the steering wheel button to tempo-
rarily disengage the cruise control and set it in
standby mode - set speed is shown in brackets
in the display, e.g.
(100).
Standby mode due to driver intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
than 1 minute
1
the gear selector is moved to neutral posi-
tion (automatic gearbox)
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
to the last stored speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, such as Stability and traction
control (DSTC). If any of these systems stop
working then cruise control is automatically
deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message
Cruise control
Cancelled
is shown in the display. The driver
must then intervene and adapt the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
engine speed is too low/high
speed falls below 30 km/h
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated
with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with
.
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button
in standby mode or
with one long press in active mode. The set
speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with
the
button.
1
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
The radar sensor and its limitations
Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the
radar sensor is also used by the Collision
Warning with Auto Brake function (see
page 184) and the Distance Alert function (see
page 181). The function of the radar sensor is
to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same
direction, in the same lane.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in
it being illegal to use.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not
maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis-
tance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The Function section and onwards informs
about limitations of which the driver should
be aware before using the adaptive cruise
control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxil-
iary lamps must not be installed in front of
the grille.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
on slip roads.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-
cles in front is reduced significantly:
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have col-
lected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor
clean.
if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed.
Examples where the cruise control does
not work optimally
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
178
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G021414
The ACC cannot see small vehicles (Dark triangle:
ACC field of vision).
Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect
vehicles at close distances, e.g. a vehicle
that drives in between the car and vehicles
in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane
can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual
this means that the
radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked
and that vehicles in front of the car could not
be detected.
In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise
Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning
with Auto Brake functions are not operating
either.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
179
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or
snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig-
nals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy
road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no
longer blocked.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.
Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.
Time interval activated, during adjustment.
Time interval activated, after adjustment.
Turn on DSTC to enable
Cruise
Cruise control cannot be activated until the stability and traction control function (DSTC) has been set
in Normal mode.
Cruise control Cancelled
The cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
180
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Message Specification
Cruise control Unavailable
Cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See manual
Cruise control temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 177.
Cruise control Service
required
Cruise control not working.
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
General
Distance Alert is a function that informs the
driver about the time interval to vehicles in
front.
Distance alert is active at speeds above
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No dis-
tance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
G017362
A small section of the red warning lamp in the
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if
the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter
than the set time interval.
NOTE
Distance Alert is deactivated during the time
that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
WARNING
Distance Alert only reacts if the distance to
the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset
value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is
not affected.
Operation
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched
on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Set time interval
Controls and display.
Time interval - Increase/decrease
Time interval - On, during adjustment
Time interval - On, after adjustment
Time intervals are increased using
and
decreased using
.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
display as 1-5 horizontal lines
- the more lines the longer the
time distance. One line corre-
sponds to approximately
1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approx-
imately 2.5 seconds.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
04
182
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds after-
wards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the dis-
play. The same symbol is also shown when
adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed, the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a specific time
interval.
The set time interval is also used by the
adaptive cruise control function, see
page 175.
Only use the time interval that is allowed in
accordance with local traffic regulations.
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as
adaptive cruise control and the collision warn-
ing system. For more information on the radar
sensor and its limitations, see page 177.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi-
cles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Set time interval, during adjustment.
Set time interval, after adjustment.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
Symbol Message Specification
Radar blocked.
See manual
Distance Alert temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 177.
Collision warn. Service
required
Distance Alert and Collision Warning with Auto Brake are fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Collision Warning with Auto Brake (Collision
Warning with Auto Brake) is designed to assist
the driver when there is a risk of colliding with
a vehicle in front that is stationary or driving in
the same direction.
The collision warning system has the following
three functions.
Collision Warning – Warns the driver of a
potentially imminent collision.
Brake Support – Assists the driver to
brake effectively in a critical situation.
Auto Brake – Brakes the car automatically
when a collision is unavoidable. The Auto
Brake function cannot prevent a collision
but instead aims to reduce collision speed.
The collision warning system is activated in sit-
uations where the driver should have started
braking a lot earlier, which is why the function
cannot help the driver in every situation.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed
to be activated as late as possible in order to
avoid unnecessary intervention.
The collision warning system must not be used
as an excuse for the driver to change his/her
driving style. If the driver solely relies on Colli-
sion Warning with Auto Brake to do the brak-
ing, there will be a collision sooner or later.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of collision warning system
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not work
in all driving situations and traffic, weather
and road conditions. The collision warning
system does not react to vehicles driving in
another direction to the car or to people and
animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. The Function section and
the section after advise about limitations of
which the driver should be aware before
using Collision Warning with Auto Brake.
The Auto Brake function can only reduce the
collision speed. The driver must depress the
brake pedal to achieve full brake function.
Never wait for a collision warning. When
driving you are responsible for maintaining
the correct distance and speed, even when
the collision warning system is used.
Function
G017382
Functions overview.
Visual warning signal in the event of a col-
lision risk
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
Collision warning
Together with a camera sensor, the radar sen-
sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi-
cles driving in the same direction in front of the
car.
In the event of there being a risk of collision with
such a vehicle your attention is drawn with a
red flashing warning lamp and a warning
sound.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
Brake support
If the risk of collision still increases after the
collision warning then the brake support is acti-
vated. The brake support prepares the brake
system for rapid braking and the brakes are
applied gently, which may be noticed as a
slight jerk.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented,
even with light pedal force.
Auto Brake
If the driver has not yet started an evasive
manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a
collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func-
tion comes into effect, without the driver need-
ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then
takes place with limited brake force in order to
reduce collision speed. The driver has to brake
in order to achieve full brake force.
Operation
Settings are made from the centre console dis-
play via a menu system. For information on
how the menu system is used, see page 130.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func-
tions are always enabled - they cannot be
deactivated.
On and Off
To select whether the collision warning system
should be switched on or off: In the menu Car
settings
Collision warning settings
choose between the options
On or Off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
Activating/deactivating warning signals
The warning lamp is activated automatically
when the engine is started if the system is
switched on.
The warning sound can be activated/deacti-
vated separately using the options for
On or
Off in the menu system under Car settings
Collision warning settings Warning
sound.
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed. Select one of the options from
Long, Normal or Short in the menu system
under Car settings
Collision warning
settings
Warning distance.
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance
Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with
Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which
could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-
uations, then change to warning distance
Normal.
Only use warning distance
Short in excep-
tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will be
used by the cruise control even if the colli-
sion warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but
the function cannot shorten driver reaction
time.
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with the Distance
Alert set at time interval 4 – 5. see
page 181.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
186
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long then in certain situations warnings
could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the
event of large differences in speed or if vehi-
cles in front brake heavily.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on the
centre console display. Access via the menu
for Car settings
Collision warning
settings, see page 131.
Limitations
The collision warning system is active from and
including approx. 7 km/h.
The visual warning signal may be difficult to
notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec-
tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn-
ing sound should therefore always be acti-
vated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity to
avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS
and DSTC systems will provide best possible
braking force with maintained stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
Warnings may not appear if the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is small or if
steering wheel and pedal movements
are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
stationary or slow vehicles so the system
provides less effective warnings or no warn-
ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above
70 km/h) for such vehicles.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to dark-
ness.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 177.
An absent or late warning could mean that
there is no brake support or it comes late.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This would lead to the system warn-
ing at a later stage, which reduces the total
number of warnings.
When the car is reversing Collision Warning
with Auto Brake cannot be activated.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti-
vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
why the system does not intervene in situations
where the car is approaching a vehicle in front
very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which
is why Collision Warning with Auto Brake does
not intervene in situations where the driver is
steering, braking or accelerating in a clear
manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains sta-
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,
then speed is reduced to the same speed as
that maintained by the vehicle in front.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
Camera sensor limitations
The car's camera sensor is used by the three
functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake,
Driver Alert Control, see page 190 and Lane
Departure Warning, see page 193.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Do not attach or fit anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor, as this
could reduce or prevent the function of one
or more camera-dependent systems.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark-
ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for
example. Under such conditions the functions
of camera-dependent systems could be sig-
nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty
road surfaces or unclear lane markings could
also significantly reduce a camera sensor func-
tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage-
way and detecting other vehicles for example.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
Sensors blocked
then this means that the
camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles or road markings in front of the car.
In turn this means that the Collision Warning
with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and
Driver Alert Control functions are not operating
with full functionality.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the wind-
screen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently
well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy
rain or snowfall.
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera has been
cleaned but the
message remains.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to meas-
ure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen
inside the camera
cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recom-
mended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
188
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Collis'n warning OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Collision warn. Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Auto braking was acti-
vated
Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the READ button.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 187.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
Symbol Message Specification
Radar blocked. See man-
ual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 177.
Collision warn. Service
required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System – DAC*
04
190
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on Driver Alert
System
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-
ent functions, which can either be switched on
at the same time or individually:
Driver Alert Control (DAC)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see
page 193.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is depend-
ent on the lane having side markings painted
on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not work in all
situations but is instead only intended to be
of supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
that the car is driven safely.
General information on Driver Alert
Control - DAC
The function is intended to attract the driver's
attention when he/she starts to drive less con-
sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or
starts to fall asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of
the road with the driver's steering wheel move-
ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does
not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations,
see page 187.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-
riorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For
this reason it is always important to stop and
take a break in the event of any signs of driver
fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC
issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular
intervals and ensure that you are fully
rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
if the driver tests the LDW function.
in strong side winds.
on rutted road surfaces.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System – DAC*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
Operation
Some settings are made from the centre con-
sole display and its menu system. For informa-
tion on how the menu system is used, see
page 130.
The current status can be checked on the trip
computer display with the left-hand stalk
switch.
Thumbwheel. Turn until the display shows
Driver
Alert
. The second row displays the Off, U
navailable
or Level mark options.
READ confirms or clears a warning in the
memory.
Activating Driver Alert Control
Using the centre console display with its menu
system, search and locate Car settings
Driver Alert. Select the On option.
The function is activated when speed
exceeds 65 km/h and remains active
as long as the speed is over
60 km/h.
The display shows a level mark with 1-5 bars,
where a low number of bars indicates incon-
sistent driving style. A high number of bars
indicates stable driving.
If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as
the text message
Driver Alert Time for a
break
. The warning is repeated after a time if
driving ability does not improve.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as
a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired-
ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dan-
gerous to drive while tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Driver Alert OFF
Function not switched on.
Driver Alert Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 187.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System – DAC*
04
192
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Message Specification
Driver Alert
The function analyses the driver's driving style.
The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent
driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 187.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
General information on Lane Departure
Warning - LDW
The function is intended to reduce the risk for
single-vehicle accidents – accidents where, in
certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car-
riageway and is in danger of driving either into
a ditch or into oncoming traffic.
LDW consists of a camera that detects the side
markings painted on the carriageway. The
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the
vehicle crosses a side marking.
Operation and function
The function is switched on or off by means of
a switch on the centre console. An indicator
lamp in the button illuminates when the func-
tion is switched on.
The trip computer display shows
Lane Depart
Warn Unavailable
when the function is in
standby mode.
The LDW function is activated automatically
from standby mode after the camera has scan-
ned in the carriageway's side markings and
speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer
display then shows
Lane Depart Warn
Available
.
If the camera can no longer detect the carria-
geway's side markings or if speed decreases
to below 60 km/h then the function resumes
standby mode and the display shows
Lane
Depart Warn Unavailable
.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side
marking of the carriageway without due cause
then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.
No warning is given in the following situations:
Direction indicators activated
The driver has his/her foot on the brake
pedal
1
In the event of the accelerator pedal being
depressed rapidly
1
In the event of rapid steering wheel move-
ments
1
In the event of a sudden turn so that the car
rolls.
The camera sensor also has certain limitations.
For more information, see page 187.
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the
wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic
alarm when there is a line between the car's
wheels.
1
A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 195.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
194
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Lane departure warning
On/Off
The function is switched on/off.
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart Warn Unavail-
able
Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor
is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 187.
Lane Depart Warn Availa-
ble
The function scans the carriageway's side markings.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 187.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
Personal preferences
See the centre console display with its menu
system and there search for Car settings
Lane departure warning, see page 131.
Select from the options:
On at start up - This option sets the function
in standby mode each time the engine is
started. Otherwise the same value as when the
engine was switched off is obtained.
Increased sensitivity – This option increases
sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and
fewer limitations apply.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
196
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console display indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only
Both front and rear.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
Be aware of e.g. people or animals near
the car.
Function
The system is automatically activated when the
car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Active
Active
Active
1
2
3
Display screens in different situations.
Display in a car with rear sensors only -
obstacle detected by both right-hand sen-
sors.
Display in a car with front and rear sensors
- right-hand front sensor is 30 cm or closer
to a detected obstacle.
Display in a car with front and rear sensors
- no obstacle front or rear detected.
The centre console display shows an overview
of the relationship between the car and
detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sen-
sor(s) detected an obstacle. The more marked
fields in the same sector, the shorter the dis-
tance between the car and detected obstacle.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
197
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the marked sensors' bar is fully
filled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacle
is within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance
G017833
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The system must be deactivated when revers-
ing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar - otherwise they would trigger the
sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo
genuine trailer wiring is used.
Front parking assistance
G021424
The distance covered in front of the car is about
0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
front comes from one of the front loudspeak-
ers.
Front parking assistance is active up to
15 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated
in order to indicate that the system is activated.
When the speed is below 10 km/h the system
is reactivated.
NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied or P mode
is selected in a car with an automatic gear-
box.
IMPORTANT
When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that
they must not obscure the sensors – the
auxiliary lamps could then be detected as
obstacles.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illuminates
with constant glow and the informa-
tion display shows
Park assist syst Service
required
then parking assistance is disen-
gaged.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
198
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external audio
sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-
quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Cleaning the sensors
Sensor location, front.
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
199
General information on BLIS
G021426
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
BLIS is an information system based on cam-
era technology that under certain conditions
can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in
the same direction as the host vehicle in the so-
called "blind spot".
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
The system is designed to work most effec-
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
When a camera (1) has detected a vehicle
inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2)
illuminates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the sys-
tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
on the information display. In such cases,
check and clean the lenses.
If necessary, the system can be switched off
temporarily, see the section Activate/deacti-
vate.
Blind spots
A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m
Activating/deactivating
Button for activating/deactivating.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
04
200
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated after
starting the engine with one press on the
BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the but-
ton goes out and a message is shown in the
instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash three times. Press the READ but-
ton to delete the text message. (For a descrip-
tion of messages, see page 134).
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if:
you overtake another vehicle at a speed of
up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle
you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up
to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers-
ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-
vent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched
on then the system does not detect the vehi-
cles. This means for example that the system
does not react to a trailer without headlamps
which is towed behind a car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or
moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
those of the human eye, i.e. they do not
"see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall, against
strong light or in thick fog.
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-
era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away
from the lenses.
Messages on the display
Message Specification
Blind-spot info
system ON
The BLIS system is
activated.
Blind spot syst.
Service required
Blind spot syst. dis-
engaged - contact a
workshop.
Blind spot syst.
Camera blocked
The BLIS camera is
blocked by dirt,
snow or ice - clean
the lenses.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
201
Message Specification
Blind spot syst.
Reduced function
Reduced function in
the data transmis-
sion between the
BLIS system's cam-
era and the car's
electrical system.
The camera resets
itself when the data
transmission
between the BLIS
system's camera
and the car's electri-
cal system returns to
normal.
Blind-spot info
system OFF
The BLIS system is
deactivated.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-
lated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
display shows the text
Blind spot syst.
Service required
.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
202
Storage spaces
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
203
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat
cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment, cup holder
Jacket holder
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
Jacket holder
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other com-
partments. Otherwise they may injure peo-
ple in the car in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
Tunnel console
Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs),
input for AUX and USB*
1
(e.g. iPod) under
the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passen-
ger as well as 12 V socket and small com-
partment. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter
are specified then there is a cigarette
lighter in the 12 V socket and a detachable
ashtray in the small compartment.)
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*
The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached
by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Glovebox
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can
be locked with the key blade, see page 47.
1
For RSE* the USB input is in a different location, see page 148.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
204
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Floor mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor
mats.
WARNING
The floor mat at the driver's seat must be
firmly fitted and secured in the attachment
clips to prevent it from being trapped
around and under the pedals.
Vanity mirror
G021438
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's
side* and passenger side respectively, is
switched on automatically when the cover is
raised.
12 V socket
G021439
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
G021440
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers. For the socket to supply current,
the remote control key must be in at least key
position I, see page 74.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets are used
simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is
applicable.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
For more information, see page 227.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
205
General
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console
Bluetooth
TM
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth
TM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-
tem. The audio system then works handsfree,
with the option to control a range of the mobile
phone's functions remotely. The mobile phone
can be operated by its own keys irrespective of
whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis-
tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Phone functions, controls overview
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME – Same functionality available in
steering wheel keypad.
Number and letter buttons
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
Navigation button
EXIT - End/refuse phone calls, clear
entered characters, interrupt current func-
tion. Same functionality available in steer-
ing wheel keypad.
ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but-
ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Same
functionality available in steering wheel
keypad.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con-
sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-
eral information on menus, see page 130.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with both
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree and built-in phone
then there is an additional menu (for chang-
ing the phone) in the phone menu, see
page 131.
Activating/deactivating
A short press on PHONE activates the hands-
free function. The text
PHONE at the top of the
display shows that it is in phone mode. The
symbol
shows that the handsfree func-
tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the
handsfree function and disconnects a con-
nected phone.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
206
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been con-
nected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow one of the sets of
instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via Bluetooth
TM
, see mobile phone manual
or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE.
>
Menu option
Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been registered
then these are also shown.
3.
Select
Add phone.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective Bluetooth
TM
name in the dis-
play. The handsfree function's
Bluetooth
TM
name is shown in the
mobile phone such as
My Car.
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio
system display via the mobile phone key-
pad.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE. If there is a phone connected,
disconnect the connected phone.
2.
Search with the phone's Bluetooth
TM
, see
the mobile phone manual.
3.
Select
My Car in the list of units detected
in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile
phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5.
Select to connect to
My Car from the
mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected
automatically to the audio system while the text
Synchronising is shown in the display. For
more information on how mobile phones are
registered, see page 208.
When the connection is established the symbol
is shown and the mobile phone Bluetooth
TM
name is shown in the display. Now the
mobile phone can be controlled from the audio
system.
To call
1.
Make sure that the text
PHONE is shown
at the top of the display and that the
symbol is visible.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 208.
3.
Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. For more information on connection,
see page 208.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-
vating the handsfree function with one long
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is
also deactivated when the engine is switched
off or when a door is opened
1
.
When the mobile phone has been discon-
nected an ongoing call can be continued with
the mobile phone's built-in microphone and
speaker.
1
Only Keyless Drive.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
207
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the
changeover from handsfree is confirmed
from the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the
audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically.
±
Activate/deactivate under Call options
Automatic answer.
In call menu
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call
to access the following functions:
Mute microphone - audio system micro-
phone is muted.
Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans-
ferred to the mobile phone.
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection
is terminated when the privacy function is
used. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
Phone book – searching in the phone
book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an
ongoing call.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The call volume can be regulated when the
handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the
steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,
the audio system volume is controlled as usual
with VOLUME. In order to control audio system
volume during an ongoing call you have to
switch to one of the audio sources.
The audio source can be automatically muted
for incoming calls under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring volume and adjust with / on the
navigation button.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-
nals that can be selected under Phone
settings
Sounds and volume Ring
signals
Ring signal 1 etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is
not deactivated when one of the handsfree
system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal
2
, go to Phone settings Sounds and
volume
Ring signals Use mobile
phone signal.
2
Not supported by all mobile phones.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
208
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg-
istered. Registration is performed once per
phone. After registration the phone no longer
needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of
one mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth
Remove phone.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the audio sys-
tem searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the display. To change over
to manual connection of another phone, press
EXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone other
than the last connected or change the con-
nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
1. Set the audio system in phone mode.
2.
Press PHONE and select one of the
phones in the list.
The connection can also be made via the menu
system.
The menu structure is available in two variants
depending on whether the car only has
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree or if the car also has a
built-in phone.
For cars with only Bluetooth
TM
handsfree
the connection is made under Main menu
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Connect
phone or Main menu Bluetooth
Bluetooth Change phone Add
phone.
For cars with built-in phone and
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree the connection is
made under Main menu Bluetooth
Bluetooth Connect phone or Main
menu Bluetooth
Change phone
Add phone.
Phone book
All use of the phone book presupposes that the
text
PHONE is shown at the top of the display
and that the
symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each registered mobile phone. The
phone book is copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection.
±
Deactivate the function under Phone
settings
Synchronise phone book.
Searching for contacts is only performed in
the connected mobile phone's phone
book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy-
ing of the phone book then
List is empty is
shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book is
with long presses on the keys 2–9. This starts
a search in the phone book based on the key's
first letter.
The phone book can also be reached with
/
on the navigation button or with / on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also
be performed from the phone book's Search
menu under Phone book
Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
2.
Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to
call.
Voice recognition
The mobile phone's voice recognition function
for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
209
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the voice recognition func-
tion. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer or visit
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Voice mail number
Voice mail number can be changed under Call
options
Voice mail number. If there is no
number stored then this menu can be reached
with one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long time
to use the stored number.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-
tion at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are
available under
Call register.
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled calls in reverse order.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre con-
sole. Press once for the key's first character,
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for
more characters, see the following table.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input
characters.
/ on the navigation button
scrolls between the characters.
Key Function
Space . 1 - ? ! , : " ' ( )
A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç
D E F 3 È É
G H I 4 Ì
J K L 5
M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø
P Q R S 7 ß
T U V 8 Ü Ù
W X Y Z 9
Key Function
Pressed briefly if two characters
shall be entered after each other
with the same key.
+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %
Shift between upper and lower
case letter
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
210
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
System overview.
Microphone
SIM card reader
Keypad, see page 148.
Control panel
Privacy handset*
Safety
Engage a workshop to perform the service via
the phone. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
shop. The built-in phone must be switched off
during refuelling or in the vicinity of blasting
work. IDIS limits the menu system depending
on the speed of the car, see page 212.
Remember
SIM card
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card Subscriber Identity Module. For installa-
tion, see page 213. Emergency calls to emer-
gency numbers can be made without a SIM
card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM
cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work.
Contact the network operator if the SIM
card needs to be changed.
Menus and controls
The menus are navigated using the control
panel (4) and the steering wheel keypad (3). For
general information on menus, see page 130.
For information on the phone's controls, see
page 205.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with both
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree and built-in phone
then there is an additional menu (for chang-
ing the phone) in the phone menu, see
page 131.
On/Off
Switch on the phone with a short press on
PHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary. The
symbol shows that the phone is switched
on. When this symbol is shown calls can be
received even if the CD menu for example is
shown in the display. Briefly press PHONE to
use the phone menus and to dial out. The text
PHONE shows that the phone menu is active.
Switch off the phone with one long press on
PHONE.
Making and receiving calls
Making calls
1. Switch on the phone.
2.
If
PHONE is not shown in the display,
briefly press PHONE.
3. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 211.
4.
Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up
the privacy handset*. Release the handset
by pulling it down.
Ending a call
End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up
the privacy handset*.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
211
Incoming call
Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the
privacy handset*. If the privacy handset* is off
the hook when the phone rings then calls must
be received using ENTER.
End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up
the privacy handset*. Refuse calls using EXIT.
Automatic answer
See page 207.
Call waiting
The function enables a new call to be answered
during an ongoing call. The new call is
answered as usual and the previous call is put
on hold.
±
Activate/deactivate under Call options
Call waiting.
Automatic diversions
Incoming calls can be diverted automatically
depending on the type of call and situation.
±
Activate/deactivate under Call options
Diversions.
During a call
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access
the In-call menu.
To call
1.
Put the call on hold under
Hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party or use the
Phone book menu option.
Switch between calls using the
Swap menu
option.
Conference call
A conference call consists of several parties. It
can be initiated when a call is underway and
another is on hold. The
Join menu option starts
the conference call.
All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con-
ference call is terminated.
Switching between the privacy handset*
and handsfree
Switch from handsfree to the privacy hand-
set* by picking up the privacy handset or
selecting in the menu.
Switch from the privacy handset* to handsfree
using the
Handsfree menu option.
Mute mode
Mute mode involves deactivating the micro-
phone, see page 210.
±
Activate/deactivate the microphone using
the
Microphone on/Mute microphone
menu option.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The phone uses the front door speakers. Call
volume can be controlled when the text
PHONE is shown at the top of the display.
±
Use the steering wheel keypad or
VOLUME.
Audio system volume
See page 149.
Signals and volume
Change the ring signal under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signals.
Activate/deactivate the message beep under
Phone settings
Sounds and volume
Message beep.
Control the ring volume under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring volume.
Adjust using
/ on the navigation button.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
212
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Phone book
Contact information can be stored on the SIM
card or in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book
1.
Press MENU and scroll to Phone book
New contact.
2.
Enter a name and press ENTER. For infor-
mation on text input, see below.
3.
Enter a number and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
SIM card or Phone memory and
press ENTER.
Inputting text
See page 209.
Searching for contacts
See page 208.
Erasing contacts
Erase a contact in the phone book by selecting
it and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to
Erase
and press ENTER.
Erase all contacts under Phone book
Erase
SIM or Erase phone.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and the phone book
Go to Phone book Copy all SIM to
phone or
Phone to SIM and press ENTER.
Voice mail number
See page 209.
Other functions and settings
IDIS
IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System)
can, in active driving situations, delay or refuse
ring signals from incoming calls. This way less
attention is distracted from driving.
±
IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings
IDIS.
Reading messages
1.
Scroll to Messages
Read and press
ENTER.
2.
Scroll to a message and press ENTER.
3. The message text is shown in the display.
Additional selections can be made by
pressing ENTER.
Writing and sending messages
1.
Scroll to Messages
Write new and
press ENTER.
2.
Enter text and press ENTER. For informa-
tion on text input, see page 209.
3.
Scroll to
Send and press ENTER.
4.
Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
Message settings
Message settings are not normally changed.
The network provider has further information
on these settings. There are three options
under Messages
Message settings:
SMSC number - Specifies the message
centre which will transfer the messages.
Validity time - Specifies how long the
message will be stored in the message
centre.
Message type.
Call lists
Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are
stored in
Call register. Dialled calls are also
shown by pressing ENTER. The phone num-
bers in the lists can be saved in the phone
book.
Call duration
Call duration is stored under Call register
Call duration.
±
Reset the values under Call register
Call duration Reset timers.
Show/hide number for third party
The phone number can be temporarily hidden
under Call options
Send my number.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
213
IMEI number
In order to block a phone the network provider
must be advised of the phone's IMEI number.
±
Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis-
play. Write it down and keep it in a safe
place.
Network selection
The network can be selected either automati-
cally or manually under Phone settings
Network selection.
SIM code and security
The PIN code can protect the SIM card from
unauthorised use.
The code can be changed under Phone
settings
Edit PIN code.
Change the security level under Phone
settings
SIM security.
Select maximum security with the
On option.
The code will then need to be entered each
time the phone is switched on.
Select the next highest security level with the
Automatic option. The phone then stores the
code and automatically specifies it when the
phone is switched on. When the SIM card is
used with another phone the code must be
entered manually.
Select minimum security with the
Off option.
The SIM card can then be used without the
code at all.
Reset to factory settings
The phone settings are fully reset under Phone
settings
Reset Phone settings.
Installing the SIM card
G021450
G021451
Make sure that the phone is deactivated.
Pull out the SIM card holder which is
located in the glovebox.
Place the SIM card with the metal surface
visible
and fit the cover on the SIM card
holder
. Refit the SIM card holder.
214
Recommendations during driving......................................................... 216
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 219
Fuel....................................................................................................... 220
Loading................................................................................................. 224
Cargo area............................................................................................ 228
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 231
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 237
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
05
216
General
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Do not use winter tyres when the winter
season is over.
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the fuel con-
sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road -
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel
consumption.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
tance, leading to higher fuel consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in use.
Do not run the engine to operating tem-
perature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
The V70 with the D5 engine and 6-speed
manual transmission is started in 2nd gear
under normal conditions.
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 11 and 306.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the water
to a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driv-
ing with a trailer, see page 231.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high the instrument panel's
warning symbol is illuminated and there is
a text message displayed there
High
engine temp Stop safely
- stop the car in
a safe way and allow the engine to run at
idling speed for several minutes to cool
down.
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
05
``
217
If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine
or Coolant level low, Stop
engine
is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
the instrument panel's warning symbol and
there is a text message displayed there
Transmission hot Reduce speed or
Transmission hot Stop safely - follow
the recommendation given and lower the
speed and stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool
down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a while after the engine has been
switched off.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat-
tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key
position II when the engine is switched off.
Instead use the I mode - which uses less
power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume)
headlamps.
If the battery voltage is low the information dis-
play shows the text
Low battery Power save
mode
. The energy-saving function then shuts
down certain functions or reduces certain
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or
audio system.
±
In which case, charge the battery by star-
ting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
effective during driving than running the
engine at idling speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption is normal.
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle is a legal
requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
The engine coolant must contain at least
50% glycol. This mixture protects the
engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve optimum
antifreeze protection, different types of gly-
col must not be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-
ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
page 301.
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
05
218
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
The condition of the battery and charge
level must be inspected. Cold weather pla-
ces great demands on the battery and its
capacity is reduced by the cold.
Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the
washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels
if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
05 During your journey
Refuelling
05
219
Refuelling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the
lighting panel - the flap opens when the button
is released.
The filler flap is located on the right-hand rear
wing, as indicated by the information display's
arrow by the symbol
.
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a
click confirms that it is closed.
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible.
1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap) and locate
the green cord with handle.
2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open
the cap slowly.
After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one
or more clicking sounds are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
220
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power
and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-
ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical
attention immediately if fuel has been swal-
lowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
nation with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-
dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-
ical reaction without being used up them-
selves.
Lambda-sond
TM
oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion, and
together with the three-way catalytic converter
reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-
bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in
exceptional cases.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
``
221
IMPORTANT
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as
not to damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use additives not recommended
by Volvo.
Bioethanol E85
Do not modify the fuel system or its compo-
nents, and do not replace components with
parts that are not specifically designed for use
with bioethanol.
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on the
inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct
alternative fuel.
The use of components not designed for
bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury
or engine damage.
Reserve fuel can
The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,
see the NOTE box, page 109.
IMPORTANT
Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely
fastened and that its cap is sealed.
WARNING
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive
gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it
is refuelled with ethanol.
Diesel
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con-
taminants, such as excessively high volumes
of sulphur particles for example. Only use die-
sel fuel from well-known producers. Never use
diesel of dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-
peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-
cipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
Special additives
Marine Diesel Fuel
Fuel oil
RME
1
(Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta-
ble oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine
means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
1
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
222
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
tank may need to be vented in the workshop in
order to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-
vation, the fuel system needs a few moments
to carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
1. Place the remote key in the ignition switch
and push it gently so that it is pulled in (see
page 74).
2.
Press the START button without depress-
ing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-
tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission con-
trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col-
lected in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-
ically at an interval of approximately
300-900 km depending on driving conditions.
Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It
may take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during
regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the
instrument panel illuminates, and the message
Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the
instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for approx-
imately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be
noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up with particles then it can
be difficult to start the engine and the filter
will be incapable of functioning. Then there
is a risk that the filter will have to be
replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
is equipped with extra equipment that affects
the car's weight. See information on weights
page 293 and table page 304.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect fuel
consumption.
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
223
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
nation with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
05 During your journey
Loading
05
224
General information on loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed infor-
mation on weights, see page 293.
The tailgate is opened via a button on
the lighting panel or the remote con-
trol key, see page 57.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on the weight and distribution of
the load.
To bear in mind when loading
Position the load firmly against the back-
rest in front.
Put wide loads in the centre.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-
lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compro-
mised or eliminated by high loads.
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy brak-
ing the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into
a drive position - and the car could then
move off.
Front seat
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load, see page 76.
Roof load
Using load carriers
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, the load carriers
designed by Volvo are recommended.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-
racteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information on maximum permitted roof
load, including load carriers and any space
box, see page 293.
05 During your journey
Loading
05
``
225
Lowering the rear seat backrest
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seat backrest can be folded down, see
page 78.
Securing loads
On both sides of the cargo area there are sev-
eral mounting points designed for securing
loads. They are located in the floor and in the
top edge of both sides of the cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are
loose or protrude could cause injury during
heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Floor rails
Load secured in both upper and lower mounting
points.
In the floor of the cargo area there are two rails
with movable cargo retaining hooks for secur-
ing items in the cargo area using cargo retain-
ing straps.
IMPORTANT
Do not use other adjustable straps as these
could pull and break the mounting points.
Cleaning
Dirt and objects collecting down in the rails
could hinder the repositioning, locking, raising
and removal of the cargo retaining hooks.
Make it a habit to clean the tracks with a vac-
uum cleaner and a lightly-moistened soft cloth.
Cargo retaining straps
G019397
Strap retention.
One loop of the cargo retaining strap around
one of the cargo retaining hooks secures the
strap and prevents it from sliding around the
hook.
NOTE
A suitable width for a cargo retaining strap
is approx. 25 mm.
05 During your journey
Loading
05
226
Moving a cargo retaining hook
G017742
Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the
direction to which its opening points.
Press the hook down lightly and at the
same time push it to the required position.
Fold the hook up – it is self-locking.
NOTE
There must be at least 50 cm between the
cargo retaining hooks in the rail.
Removing a cargo retaining hook
G018134
The cargo retaining hooks can be easily
removed from the rail, e.g. for cleaning the bot-
tom of the rail.
Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the
direction to which its opening points.
Press the hook down lightly and at the
same time slide it to the cut-out opening.
Lift the hook straight up.
Securing the hook takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
A removed hook must be pressed down
lightly at the same time in order to enable its
reinsertion into the rail.
Cargo retaining hook correctly fitted/
incorrectly fitted
G019581
Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly!
It is important that the cargo retaining hooks
are fitted correctly. The hooks' openings must
point away from each other.
WARNING
Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly. Oth-
erwise the cargo retaining strap will move
the cargo retaining hook down so that it
loosens and the strap slides off.
05 During your journey
Loading
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
Bag holder*
G017745
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and
prevents them from overturning and spreading
their contents across the cargo area.
1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor
hatch.
2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the
carrying handle in the hooks.
12 V electrical socket*
G017825
Lower the cover to access the electrical
socket. The socket also provides voltage when
the remote control key is not in the ignition
switch.
NOTE
Remember not to use the electrical socket
with the engine switched off because of the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
05 During your journey
Cargo area
05
228
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Safety net*
Storage space, safety net cassettes.
A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes
has a storage space under the cargo area floor
hatch.
Securing the net cassettes
The two-part safety net cassette is secured on
the rear of the backrest. The narrowest cas-
sette is secured on the left-hand side (seen
from the tailgate).
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward, see
page 79.
2. Align the cassette's anchor rails in front of
the backrest attachment lugs
.
3. Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs
.
4. Fold back and lock the backrests.
Removing the cassettes takes place in
reverse order.
Using the safety net
G018246
Pull the net up from the cassettes. The net is
self-locking after about 1 minute if the rear
seat's backrests are raised.
Pull up the right-hand section of the net
using its strap.
Insert the rod in the mounting on the right-
hand side and then press it forward – the
rod locks in with a click.
Pull out the rod's telescope section and
click it in on the other side.
Pull up the left-hand safety net and hook it
into the rod.
Folding up takes place in reverse order.
The net can also be used when the rear seat's
backrests are folded forward.
Removing the net cassettes
1. Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in
accordance with the procedure in the sec-
tion entitled "Using the safety net", but in
reverse.
2. Fold the whole backrest forward.
3. Slide the cassettes out until they loosen
from the anchor rails.
Store the cassettes in their compartment under
the cargo area floor hatch.
05 During your journey
Cargo area
05
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
229
WARNING
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly
secured, even if the safety net is correctly
fitted.
Safety net combined with cargo cover
G018247
Puller-straps for raising the net.
The safety net can also be raised from the rear
seat when the cargo cover is extended.
Follow the procedure in the section entitled
"Using the safety net". The straps for raising
are located by the arrows.
Safety grille*
G017748
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from
being thrown forward in the passenger com-
partment in the event of sudden braking.
Folding up
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and
pull back/up.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Fitting/removal
The safety grille is normally permanently instal-
led in the car because it can easily be folded
up in the roof and so be out of the way if a
longer cargo area is required. However, if
desired, the safety grille can be dismantled and
removed from the car.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must
always be correctly fastened and secured
when being refitted.
Fitting
The backrests must first be lowered to allow
the safety grille to be fitted, see page 79.
NOTE
The safety grille is most easily fitted/
removed by two people via the rear doors.
During fitting the handle should be on the
front of the grille, see the
illustrations
.
G018367
05 During your journey
Cargo area
05
230
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G018368G018369
Position the handle in fitting position, see
illustration. Press gently on the handle to
enable it to be turned into position, see
arrow.
Press the strut in towards the grille and
align the grille in the roof mounting.
Turn the handle 90° . Press gently as in
the illustration (1) if necessary. Secure the
grille by angling the handle 90°
.
Removal of the grille takes place in reverse
order.
Cargo cover*
G017749
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
down when the cargo cover is fitted.
Attaching the cargo cover
Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corres-
ponding recess.
Press both sides in. A "click" should be
audible and the red marking should disap-
pear.
> Check that both end pieces are locked.
Removing the cargo cover
1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
disc
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
cargo area when it is fitted.
±
Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from
its support shelves, and lower.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 293.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equip-
ment for driving with a trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies
with the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see page 248.
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
For safety reasons, the maximum permit-
ted speed for the car when coupled with a
trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the
regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indica-
tors are broken, then the combined instrument
panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes
faster than normal and the display shows the
text
Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the
Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer
text is shown.
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car is
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 295.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further limit
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be
certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)
- otherwise the oil temperature may
become too high.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
232
Diesel engine 5-cyl
In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000
rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
In the event of overheating a warning sym-
bol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - follow the
recommendation given.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to drive
at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow
driving with trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission on page
115.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3.
Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when park-
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
Towing bracket
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose sec-
tion must be followed carefully, see
page 234.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Follow the installation instructions care-
fully.
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Important checks
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the tow-
ball.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
``
233
Storing the detachable towbar
G031121
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap.
Specifications
G021485
B
A
G026080
F
H
E
G
C
D
G017971
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A (V70) 1129
A (XC70) 1113
B (V70) 93
B (XC70) 77
C 855
D 428
E 112
F 346
G Side member
H Ball centre
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
234
Attaching the towbar
G018928
Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch
and then pulling the
cover straight back
.
G021487
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
G021488
The indicator window must show red.
G021489
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G021490
The indicator window must show green.
G000000
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
``
235
G021494
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling
it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry.
G021495
Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
the correct place.
Removing the towbar
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it
anticlockwise
until you hear a click.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see page 233.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
236
G018929
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
05 During your journey
Towing and recovery
05
``
237
Towing
Find out the highest legal speed for towing
before towing the car.
1. Press the remote control key into the igni-
tion switch to unlock the steering lock so
that the car can be steered, see page 74.
2. The remote control key must remain in the
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal -
thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
The steering lock must be unlocked
before towing.
The remote control key must be in key
position II.
Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch while driving or
when the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off. The
brake pedal must be pressed about five
times harder than normal, and the steering
will be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
±
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not
be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or
further than 80 km.
±
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox, Powershift
The 2.0, 2.0T and 2.0F models with Powershift
automatic transmission should not be towed
as the transmission is dependent on the engine
running in order to receive sufficient lubrica-
tion.
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it
from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
10 km/h. Note that the car must always
be towed with the wheels rolling for-
ward.
In the event of moving a longer distance
than 10 km, the car must be transported
with the drive wheels raised from the
road - professional recovery is recom-
mended.
±
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start, see page 111.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat-
alytic converter.
05 During your journey
Towing and recovery
05
238
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side
of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye
Take out the towing eye that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which
must be opened in different ways:
Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
The second variant has a marking along
one side or in a corner: Press the mark-
ing with a finger and fold out the oppo-
site side/corner at the same time using
a coin or similar - the cover turns around
its axis and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
NOTE
On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing
eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket.
Attach the towrope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the
detachable towbar's towball in the car.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transpor-
ted with the wheels rolling forward.
An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with raised
front suspension must not be towed at
speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be
towed further than 50 km.
05 During your journey
05
239
240
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General ................................................................................................. 242
Changing wheels .................................................................................. 246
Tyre pressure ....................................................................................... 248
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*.......................................................... 249
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ...................................................... 250
WHEELS AND TYRES
06 Wheels and tyres
General
06
242
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres-
sure and speed rating are important for how the
car performs.
Direction of rotation
G021778
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must
always rotate in the same direction throughout
its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched
between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice
versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain and slush out of the way are adversely
affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
NOTE
Ensure that tyres of the same type and
dimensions, and also the same make, are
fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 310.
Tyre care
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-
tion can therefore be affected. This applies to
all tyres that are stored for future use. Exam-
ples of external signs which indicate that the
tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol-
oration.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is espe-
cially important with regard to winter tyres. The
last four digits in the sequence mean the week
and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
and this is stated with four digits, for example
1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-
tured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side
of the car they were mounted on, for example
L for left and R for right.
06 Wheels and tyres
General
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
Wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 248. Driving style, tyre pres-
sure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the least
worn tyres must always be placed on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
wards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos-
sible complete loss of control over the car. This
is why it is important for the rear wheels never
to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control
of the car.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G021829
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Rims and wheel bolts
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the
nuts and the bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-
ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alu-
minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area
floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock-
able wheel bolts.
Tools
Located under the cargo area floor are the
car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.
There is also space for the sleeve for the lock-
able wheel bolts.
Jack*
The jack's thread must always be well greased.
06 Wheels and tyres
General
06
244
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The original jack should only be used for
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread
must always be well greased.
Tools - returning into place
G029336
The tools and jack* must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack needs to be
cranked together to the correct position in
order to have space.
The foam block and spare wheel are replaced
in the reverse order to taking out.
Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam
block. It must point forwards in the car.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
NOTE
If the floor hatch in the cargo area floor is not
closed then privacy locking does not work,
see page 49.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent
on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,
the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all
four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-
fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-
tres.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
06 Wheels and tyres
General
06
245
Specifications
The car has whole vehicle approval. This
means that certain combinations of wheels and
tyres are approved. For the permissible com-
binations, see page 308
Wheel (rim) dimensions
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen-
sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
16 Rim diameter in
inches
50 Off-set in mm (dis-
tance from wheel
centre to wheel con-
tact surface against
the hub)
Tyre dimensions
225/50R17 98W.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:
225 Tyre width (mm)
50 Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
17 Rim diameter in inches (")
98 Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
270 km/h).
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load,
a load index (LI). The car's weight determines
the load capacity required of the tyres. Mini-
mum permitted index is specified in the table,
see page 308.
Speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
the car's top speed. Minimum permitted speed
rating is specified in the table, see page 308.
The only exception to these conditions is win-
ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those
without), where a lower speed rating may be
used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not
be driven faster than the speed rating of the
tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a
maximum of 160 km/h).
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car
can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
It is the maximum permitted speed that is
stated in the table.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have
the same or a higher load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat.
06 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
06
246
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Removing
Set up the warning triangle, see page 249 if a
wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The
car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-
face.
1. Apply the parking brake and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has an
automatic gearbox.
If the car has full hubcaps then these should be
removed.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
2. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel
wrench* that are located under the cargo
area floor in the cargo area. If another jack
is selected, see page 256.
3. Remove any full hubcaps.
4. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones
for example.
5. (For cars with steel rims.) Prize off the
wheel cover with the end of the wheel
wrench, or pull it off by hand.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
7. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
8. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
06 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
247
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tight-
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit any full hubcaps.
NOTE
The hubcap outlet for the valve must be
located over the valve on the rim when fit-
ted.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Park the car so that passengers have the car
- or preferably a crash barrier - between
them and the road.
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos-
sible. The car's handling may be altered by the
use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is
smaller than the normal wheel. The car's
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay
attention to high kerbs and do not machine
wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the
front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the
same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on
the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare
wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the
tyre pressure table, see page 310.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one temporary spare wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. The same bolt runs
through to secure the spare wheel and the
foam block. The foam block contains all the
tools.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
06 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
06
248
Tyre pressure
G021830
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions. This is
also specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 310.
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension
ECO pressure
1
Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary
Spare)
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure is recommended (applies for both full
load and light load) in order to obtain optimum
fuel economy.
Checking the tyre pressure
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
This also applies to the car's spare wheel.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature. After several
kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-
sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs
the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low could result in the tyres
overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-
sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
1
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
06 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
249
Warning triangle
Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning
triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-
able place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy lock-
ing then the boot lid/tailgate and floor hatch
cannot be opened, see page 49.
First aid kit*
G018253
A case with first aid equipment is located under
the floor in the cargo area.
06 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
06
250
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Emergency puncture repair (TMK; Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of a
compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The
kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing
fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira-
tion date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
12 V sockets* for connecting the compressor
are located by the centre console in the front,
by the rear seat and in the cargo area. Choose
the electrical socket that is nearest the punc-
tured tyre.
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being
sealed in a trafficked location. The emergency
puncture repair kit is located under the floor in
the cargo area, see page 249.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Overview
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
06 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
251
Sealing punctured tyres
G014338
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8.
Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
06 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
06
252
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pres-
sure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure table, see page 310 (1
bar=100 kPa). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
sure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched off.
Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the
dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the near-
est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace-
ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the
workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-
ficient ventilation.
06 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
253
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V
sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
see page 310. (Release air using the pres-
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is
too high.)
6. Detach the air hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
254
Engine compartment............................................................................. 256
Lamps................................................................................................... 263
Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 269
Battery................................................................................................... 271
Fuses..................................................................................................... 274
Car care................................................................................................ 282
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
256
General
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
Coolant
Engine oil
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
WARNING
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start
automatically some time after the engine
has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack other than one recommended by Volvo
is selected, then follow the instructions
included with the equipment
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-
tion the jack against the front edge on the
engine's subframe.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi-
tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Always use axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
fixed under the lifting points on the door sill.
See preceding illustration.
Opening and closing the bonnet
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
``
257
G010951
Pull the handle by the pedals. You will hear
when the catch releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see illus-
tration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine compartment, overview
G018945
The appearance of the engine compartment may
vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator
Filler opening for engine oil
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box, engine compartment
Filling washer fluid
Air filter
WARNING
High voltage from the ignition system. The
voltage in the ignition system is highly dan-
gerous. The remote control key must always
be in 0 position when work is being done in
the engine compartment, see page 74.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the remote control key is in II position
or when the engine is hot.
Checking the engine oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 300.
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
258
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low
oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp
for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an
oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed
via the warning symbol in the centre of the
instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer-
tain models have both variants. Contact a
Volvo dealer for more information.
Filling and dipstick
G021734
Dipstick and filler pipe, petrol engine.
G021736
Dipstick
1
and filler pipe, diesel engine.
Change the engine oil in accordance with the
intervals specified in the Service and Warranty
Booklet.
IMPORTANT
When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled
must have the same grade, see page 301.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
The most accurate measurements are made on
a cold engine before starting. The measure-
ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately
after the engine is switched off. The dipstick
will indicate that the level is too low because
the oil has not had time to flow down into the
oil sump.
1
Diesel engines have an electronic dipstick.
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
``
259
G021737
The oil level must be within the area marked on the
dipstick.
Park the car on a level surface, switch off the
engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil
time to run back to the sump. For capacities,
see page 301 and onwards.
Checking with a cold engine
1. Wipe the dipstick clean.
2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must
be between the MIN and MAX marks.
3.
If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up
until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con-
sumption may increase if too much oil is
poured into the engine.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Checking with a warm engine
1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off
the engine and wait 10 - 15 minutes to
allow the oil time to run back to the sump.
2. Wipe the dipstick clean.
3. Check the oil level using the dipstick.
4.
If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up
until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
For engines with electronic dipstick
2
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see page 134.
Checking the oil level:
1.
Switch the ignition to key position II, see
page 107.
2.
Turn the thumbwheel to position
Engine
oil level Wait...
.
> The oil level in the engine is then shown.
NOTE
The oil level is only updated by the system
during driving. The system cannot detect
changes when oil is filled or drained.
If engine oil is filled or drained then the car
must be driven about 30 km before the oil
level is measured correctly.
Message
Engine oil level OK
All normal.
Engine oil level
Wait...
System initialised,
shown for
about 2 seconds.
2
Only applies to diesel.
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
260
Message
Engine oil level Fill
1 litre oil
Fill with engine oil
Engine oil level
Service required
Shown when the
system has
detected something
that needs to be rec-
tified in order to ena-
ble the correct infor-
mation regarding oil
volume to be shown.
Coolant
Checking and topping up the coolant
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see
page 302.
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-
ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool-
ing system components, flush the cool-
ing system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. High tempera-
tures may occur, causing a risk of dam-
age (cracks) to the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 302.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
``
261
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see page 302. The fluid should be changed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
mountains or tropical climates with high
humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec-
ommends that the reason for the loss of
brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Filling
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
over the cold section in the engine compart-
ment. The round cover must be removed first
before the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks, which are located on the
inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
Power steering fluid
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
cover must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
262
between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-
ties and recommended fluid grade, see
page 302.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system or if the engine is switched off and
the car must be towed, it can still be steered.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
``
263
General
For bulb specification, see page 268. Bulbs
and spotlights that are of a special type or that
are only suitable for replacement by a work-
shop are:
General interior lighting in the roof, reading
lamps
Glovebox lighting
Courtesy lighting
Direction indicators, door mirror
Approach lighting
Brake light, fog lamp, reversing lamp
Rear side position lamps, position lamps
Xenon, Active Xenon lamps
LED lamps, general
WARNING
On cars equipped with Xenon lamps, head-
lamp replacement must be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended. The lamp must be han-
dled with extreme caution because it is
equipped with a high voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin-
gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
Headlamps front
G010325
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. Loosen and remove the
whole headlamp.
WARNING
Always switch off the ignition and remove
the remote control key before starting to
replace a bulb.
Removing the headlamp
1.
Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
quickly.
2. (Upper illustration)
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Pull the headlamp straight forward.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-
nector.
3. (Lower illustration)
Detach the headlamp connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the con-
nector with your other hand.
4. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens.
5. Replace the bulb in question, .
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
264
Installing the headlamp
1. Plug in the connector. A clicking sound
should be heard.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
Check that they are correctly inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
The headlamp must be mounted and the con-
nector correctly installed before the lighting is
switched on or the remote control key is
inserted into the ignition switch.
Removing the cover
G021745
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 263.
1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out.
2. Press down the clips on the cover and
remove it.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Dipped beam, halogen
G021746
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 263.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
5. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
6. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
in. It can be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Main beam, Halogen
G021747
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
265
Extra main beam, Xenon*
G021748
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover, see page 264.
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
in. It can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Position/parking lamps
G021749
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover, see page 264.
3. For better access, detach the main beam
bulb first.
4. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb
holder.
5. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.
It can only be secured in one position.
6. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press
until a clicking sound is heard.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Direction indicators/flashers
G021750
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the small round cover.
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.
It can only be installed in one way.
5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press
until a clicking sound is heard.
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and
pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
266
Side marker lamps
G021751
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 263.
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the small round cover.
3. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb
holder.
4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.
It can only be installed in one way.
5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press
until a clicking sound is heard.
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and
pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Front fog lamps
1. Remove the cover by pressing in the 4 clips
with a thin blade and pulling straight out.
2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull
it out.
3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.
4. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise.
5. Refit the bulb. (The profile of the bulb
holder corresponds to the profile of the
foot of the bulb).
6.
Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the
bulb holder must always be upward.
Lamp housing, rear
G017456
The direction indictor bulb in the rear lamp
cluster is replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Open the panel.
2. Remove the insulation by pulling it straight
out.
3. Loosen the whole of the bulb by turning its
handle anticlockwise.
4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recom-
mend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
``
267
Location of rear bulbs
G017457
Lamp lens, right-hand side
Position lamps/brake light (LED)
Side position lights, SML (LED)
Direction indicators
Reflector, rear
Rear fog lamp (one side)
Reversing lamp
Brake light (LED)
Brake light (LED)
Number plate lighting
G017458
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
and withdraw it.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
into place.
Lighting, cargo area
G031942
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
268
Vanity mirror lighting
Removing the mirror glass
G021759
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower
edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the
lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge
on the left and right-hand sides (by the
black rubber sections), and prize carefully
so that the glass comes loose in the lower
edge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire
mirror glass and cover.
4. Replace the bulb.
Fitting the mirror glass
1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-
ror glass back into position.
2. Then press the three lower lugs back into
position.
Specification, bulbs
Lighting W Type
Extra main beam,
Xenon, ABL
55 H7
Dipped beam, hal-
ogen
55 H7
Main beam, Halo-
gen
65 H9
Front direction
indicators
21 H21W
Direction indica-
tors, rear
21 PY21W
Front fog lamps 35 H8
Cargo area light-
ing, number plate
lighting
5 Tubular
lamp
SV8.5
Vanity mirror 1.2 Tubular
lamp
SV5.5
Lighting W Type
Front position and
parking lamps
5 W5W
Front side marker
lamps
5 W5W
Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular
lamp
SV8.5
07 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
07
``
269
Wiper blades
Service position
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they
must be in service position.
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
0, see page 74, and keep the remote con-
trol key in the ignition switch.
2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for
about 1 second. The wipers then move to
standing straight up.
The wipers return to the starting position when
the car is started.
Replacing the wiper blades
Lift up the wiper arm. Press the button
located on the wiper blade mounting and
pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
G021763
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than the
blade on the passenger side.
07 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
07
270
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window
G032770
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 282 and onwards.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly.
Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-
ice life of the wiper blades.
Filling washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so
that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,
reservoir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 302.
07 Maintenance and service
Battery
07
``
271
Warning symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally responsible manner - it
contains lead.
Operation
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
ditions, climatic conditions etc.
IMPORTANT
Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery.
WARNING
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas,
which is highly explosive. One spark, which
can be generated if the jump leads are con-
nected incorrectly, is sufficient to make the
battery explode. The battery contains sul-
phuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quan-
tities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes,
seek medical attention immediately.
07 Maintenance and service
Battery
07
272
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits star-
ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Changing
Removal
Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
07 Maintenance and service
Battery
07
273
WARNING
Connect and disconnect the positive and
negative cables in the correct sequence.
Detach the black negative cable
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-
tery
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
Installation
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Secure the battery using the battery clamp.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See
Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See Removal).
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
274
General
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to pro-
tect the car's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-
cant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
Location, fuse boxes
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a
right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glo-
vebox changes sides.
,
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Engine compartment
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
``
275
Engine compartment
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
276
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General fuses, engine compartment
On the inside of the cover are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fit-
ting of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine com-
partment box. Fuses in
are located under
.
Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a work-
shop. Volvo recommends an authorised
Volvo workshop.
8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and
the recommendation for changing is that
you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.
16 – 33 and 35 – 41 are of the "MiniFuse"
type.
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a
right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glo-
vebox changes sides.
Function A
Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50
Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50
Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60
Primary fuse CJB KL30 60
Primary fuse CJB 15E
KL30
60
- -
PTC Air preheater* 100
Headlamp washers* 20
Windscreen wipers 30
Parking heater* 25
Ventilation fan 40
- -
ABS pump 40
ABS valves 20
- -
Function A
Headlamp levelling*
(Xenon, Active Xenon)
10
Primary fuse CEM 20
ABS 15-feed 5
Speed related power
steering*
5
Engine Control Module
(ECM), transm. SRS
10
Heated washer nozzles* 10
Vacuum pump 5-cyl Petrol
Turbo and GTDI
Electro-hydraulic power
steering 1.6 DRIVe
5
Lighting panel 5
- -
- -
- -
Relay, engine compart-
ment box
5
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
Function A
Auxiliary lamps* 20
Horn 15
Engine Control Module
(ECM)
10
Control module, auto-
matic gearbox*
15
Compressor A/C 15
Relay coils 5
Starter motor relay 30
Ignition coils 4-cyl. petrol,
Glow control module
10
Ignition coils 5, 6-cyl. pet-
rol
20
- -
EGR, TCV (2.0D)
HP Fuel pump (1.6D)
10
Function A
Engine control module,
Throttle petrol
10
Engine control module,
Throttle diesel
15
15
Injection system (4, 5, 6-
cyl. petrol), Mass air flow
sensor (5, 6-cyl. petrol),
ECM (6-cyl.)
Mass air flow sensor,
valves (5-cyl diesel)
Mass air flow sensor,
engine control module,
throttle (1.6D)
Mass air flow sensor
(2.0D)
15
Engine valves 10
EVAP, Lambda-sond,
Injection (petrol)
15
Lambda-sond (4-cyl. pet-
rol, 5-cyl. diesel)
10
Function A
- -
Vacuum pump, crankcase
valve (5-cyl. turbo, 2.0
GTDI)
Diesel filter heater
20
Crankcase ventilation
heater (5-cyl. diesel)
5
Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel) 60
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70
Cooling fan (4 - 5-cyl. pet-
rol)
60
Cooling fan (6-cyl. petrol),
(5-cyl. diesel)
80
- -
Electro-hydraulic power
steering (1.6D)
80
Electro-hydraulic power
steering (other)
100
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
278
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Under the glovebox
Positions
Box
A
Function A
Primary fuse, control
module, audio
Bass speaker
40
- -
- -
- -
Box
A
Function A
- -
- -
12 V socket, cargo area 15
Control panel, driver's
door
20
Control panel, front pas-
senger door
20
Box
A
Function A
Control panel, rear pas-
senger door, right
20
Control panel, rear pas-
senger door, left
20
Keyless* 20
Power seat driver's side* 20
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
Box
A
Function A
Power seat passenger
side*
20
Folding head restraint* 15
- -
Radio, Display, RTI* 10
Infotainment system 15
Telephone, Bluetooth
TM
*
5
- -
Sun roof*, interior lighting
roof, climate sensor
5
Cigarette lighter
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE)*
15
Seat heating (passenger
side)
15
Seat heating (driver's side) 15
- -
Box
A
Function A
Seat heating, rear passen-
ger side* right
15
Seat heating, rear passen-
ger side* left
15
Parking assistance*
Parking camera*
RTI*
5
Control module AWD* 10
Active chassis Four-C* 10
Box
B
Function A
Rear wiper 15
- -
Interior lighting, Power
driver's seat*
7,5
Information display (DIM) 5
Box
B
Function A
Adaptive cruise control,
ACC*, collision warning
system *
10
Interior lighting, Rain sen-
sor
7,5
Steering wheel module 7,5
Central locking system
rear, fuel filler flap
10
Washers 15
Windscreen washers 15
Opening tailgate 10
Lock tailgate 10
Fuel pump 20
Remote control key
receiver, Alarm*, Climate
5
Steering lock 15
Alarm/OBDII 5
- -
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
280
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Box
B
Function A
Airbag 10
Collision warning system,
radar front
5
Accelerator pedal, electric
engine block heater (die-
sel), power door mirrors*,
seat heating, rear *
7,5
Infotainment (ICM), CD &
Radio
A
15
Brake light 5
Sun roof* 20
Immobiliser 5
A
Not Premium or High Performance.
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
281
Cargo area
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Positions
Rear fuse box A
Electric parking brake, left 30
Electric parking brake, right 30
Rear window defroster 30
Trailer socket 2* 15
POT (automatic tailgate
opening)*
30
Rear fuse box A
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Rear fuse box A
Trailer socket 1* 40
- -
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
282
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings con-
tain chemicals that affect and discolour
paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.
Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty
surfaces.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-
ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting
is designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when it has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
For cleaning:
±
Set the wiper blades in service position,
see page 269.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-
ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-
mended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
During the first few months a new car must
only be handwashed. This is because the
paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the
locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking per-
formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
283
ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing
after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-
tions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-
ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-
essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.
More stubborn stains can be removed using
fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment such
as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre
sealing or similar could damage the paint-
work. Paintwork damage caused by such
treatments is not covered by Volvo war-
ranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers is recommended in
order to maintain the water-repellent proper-
ties. This should be used first after three years
and then each year.
Rustproofing – inspection and
maintenance
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
284
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does
not require treatment for approximately 12
years. After this period, it should be treated at
three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for
assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is
important to keep the car clean. The car's rust-
proofing needs to be checked regularly and
touched-up if necessary in order for it to be
maintained.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Volvo's cleaning agents can also be used for
stains on the mat, after vacuuming.
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic
detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the
seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and approved in accordance with the Oeko-
Tex 100 standard and is treated to preserve its
original appearance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau-
tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and
processed so that it retains its natural charac-
teristics. It is given a protective coating, but
regular cleaning is required in order to maintain
both characteristics and appearance. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product for the clean-
ing and treatment of leather upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-
ing more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail-
able from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such prod-
ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
``
285
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-
tection against stains and improved UV pro-
tection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois-
tened sponge and neutral soap.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plas-
tic.
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
±
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a
solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as group I.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as group I.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers can be used for more
difficult cleaning.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings and doors.
Materials
primer in a can
spray can or touch-up pen
1
masking tape
Colour code
Car colour code
1
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen.
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
286
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 290.
Repairing stone chips
G021832
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a
brush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of lapping paste.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the
bare metal and there is an undamaged col-
our coat, you can paint straight after clean-
ing the damaged surface.
07 Maintenance and service
07
287
288
Type designations................................................................................. 290
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 292
Engine specifications............................................................................ 298
Engine oil............................................................................................... 300
Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 302
Fuel....................................................................................................... 304
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 308
Electrical system................................................................................... 313
Type approval....................................................................................... 314
Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 315
SPECIFICATIONS
08 Specifications
Type designations
08
290
Label location
08 Specifications
Type designations
08
291
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer
regarding the car and when ordering spare
parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible when
the right rear door is opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code, component and serial num-
bers.
The engine oil label specifies oil grade and
viscosity.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
292
Dimensions
V70.
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2816
B Length 4823
C Load length, floor,
folded seat
1878
D Load length, floor 1089
E Height 1547
F Load height 724
Dimensions mm
G Front track 1588
H Rear track 1586
I Load width, floor 1153
J Width 1861
K Width including door
mirrors
2106
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
``
293
XC70.
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2815
B Length 4838
C Load length, floor,
folded seat
1878
D Load length, floor 1089
E Height 1604
F Load height 724
G Front track 1604
Dimensions mm
H Rear track 1570
I Load width, floor 1153
J Width 1861
K Width including door
mirrors
2119
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table page 295) influences the payload and is
not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
294
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with-
out extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced cor-
respondingly by the weight of the acces-
sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load-
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-
pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
For information on decal location, see page 290.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
``
295
Towing capacity and towball load
V70
Engine
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
2.0F AWD Automatic, MPS6 1000 50
All All (except 2.0F with Automatic, MPS6) 1200 50
2.0 Manual, MTX75 1320 75
2.0T Automatic, MPS6 1800 90
2.0T Manual, M66 1800 90
2.0F Manual, MTX75 1320 75
2.5T Manual, M66 1600 75
2.5T Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
2.5FT Manual, M66 1600 75
2.5FT Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
3.2 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
T6 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
D3 Manual, MMT6 1600 75
D3 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 75
D5 Manual, M66 1800 90
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
296
V70
Engine
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D5 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
D5 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
XC70
Engine
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
All All (except 2.0F with Automatic, MPS6) 1200 50
D3 Manual, M66 1600 75
D3 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 75
D5 AWD Manual, M66 2100 90
D5 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2100 90
T6 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
2.4D AWD Manual, M66 2100 90
2.4D AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2100 90
3.2 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
297
NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
bracket is recommended for trailers heavier
than 1800 kg.
08 Specifications
Engine specifications
08
298
Engine specifications
V70
Model
Engine
code
Output
(kW/
rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylin-
ders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept vol-
ume (litres)
Compres-
sion ratio
2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 190/4500 4 87 83.0 1.999 10.8:1
2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 190/4500 4 87 83.0 1.999 10.8:1
2.5FT B5254T11 170/4800 231/4800 340/1700–4800 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1
2.0T B4204T6 149/6000 203/6000 300/1750–4000 4 88 83.1 1.999 10.0:1
2.5T B5254T10 170/4800 231/4800 340/1700–4800 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1
3.2 B6324S5 185/6200 245/6200 320/3200 6 84 96.0 3.192 10.8:1
T6 B6304T4 221/5600 300/5600 400/1500–4800 6 82 93.2 2.953 9.3:1
2.0D D4204T 100/4000 136/4000 320/2000 4 85 88.0 1.997 18.5:1
D3 D5204T2 120/3000 163/3000 400/1400–2850 5 81 77.0 1.984 16.5:1
D5 D5244T10 151/4000 205/4000 420/1500–3250 5 81 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
XC70
Model
Engine
code
Output
(kW/
rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylin-
ders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept vol-
ume (litres)
Compres-
sion ratio
3.2 B6324S5 179/6400 243/6400 320/3200 6 84 96.0 3.192 10.8:1
T6 B6304T4 224/5600 304/5600 440/2100–4200 6 82 93.2 2.953 9.3:1
D3 D5204T2 120/3000 163/3000 400/1400–2850 5 81 77.0 1.984 16.5:1
08 Specifications
Engine specifications
08
299
XC70
Model
Engine
code
Output
(kW/
rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylin-
ders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept vol-
ume (litres)
Compres-
sion ratio
D5 D5244T10 151/4000 205/4000 420/1500–3250 5 81 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
2.4D
D5244T16
A
120/4000 163/4000 420/1750–3000 5 81 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
A
Certain markets
08 Specifications
Engine oil
08
300
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot-
ter than +40 °C
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-
tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Viscosity chart
08 Specifications
Engine oil
08
301
Engine oil grade
Engine variant Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume between
MIN and MAX (litres)
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
2.5FT B5254T11
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
1.3 5.5
2.5 B5254T10 1.3 5.5
3.2 B6324S5 1.2 6.8
T6 B6304T4 1.2 6.8
D3 D5204T2 1.0 5.9
D5 D5244T10 1.0 5.9
2.0 B4204S3
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
In the event of adverse conditions
use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30
0,8 4.3
2.0F B4204S4 0,8 4.3
2,5T B4204T6 0.6 4,1
1.6D D4164T 1.0 3.8
08 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
08
302
Other fluids and lubricants
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
MMT6 1.7
BOT 350M3MTX75 1.8
M66 1.9
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
MPS6 7.3
BOT 341
TF-80SC 7.0
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Coolant 2.0, 2.0F 7.8
Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed
with 50% water
A
, see the packaging.
2.0T, 2.5, 2.5FT, 3.2 and T6 8.9
D3 and D5 8.9
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering fluid Power steering WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent prod-
uct.
Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 6.5
Use a washer antifreeze recommended
by Volvo, mixed with water.
Cars without headlamp washing 4.5
08 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
08
303
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Fuel Petrol engine approx. 70 Petrol:see page 220
Diesel engine approx. 70 Diesel: see page 221
A
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gear-
box oil does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, this may be nec-
essary under adverse driving conditions,
see page 302.
08 Specifications
Fuel
08
304
CO
2
emissions and fuel consumption
V70
A B C
2.0 278 11.7 164 6.9 206 8.6
2.0F
A
278 11.7 164 6.9 206 8.6
2.0F
A
278 11.8 171 7.2 210 8.8
2.0T 259 11.1 148 6.4 189 8.1
2.0T 264 11.3 155 6.7 195 8.4
2.5T 299 12.5 157 6.6 209 8.8
2.5T 339 14.2 170 7.1 232 9.7
2.5FT
A
299 12.5 157 6.6 209 8.8
2.5FT
A
339 14.2 170 7.1 232 9.7
3,2 308 13.2 160 6.9 214 9.2
08 Specifications
Fuel
08
``
305
V70
A B C
3,2 AWD 320 13,9 169 7.3 224 9.7
T6 AWD 344 14,8 175 7.5 237 10.2
D3 188 7.2 119 4.6 144 5.5
D3 215 8,2 127 4,8 159 6.1
D5 177 6.7 125 4,7 144 5.4
D5 232 8.8 133 5.0 169 6.4
D5 AWD 255 9.7 148 5.6 187 7.1
A
A Flexifuel vehicle can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol, or bioethanol E85, as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels. The car consumes 30-40% more E85 which has a lower
energy content. The precise difference depends on driving style, ambient temperature and variations in fuel specification amongst other things.
08 Specifications
Fuel
08
306
XC70
A B C
3,2 AWD 326 14.0 181 7.8 234 10.1
T6 AWD 351 15,1 188 8.1 248 10,6
D3 201 7.7 127 4,8 154 5.9
D3 237 9.0 147 5.5 179 6.8
D5 AWD 247 9,4 145 5.5 182 6.9
D5 AWD 250 9,5 153 5.8 189 7.2
2.4D AWD
A
247 9,4 145 5.5 182 6.9
2.4D AWD
A
250 9,5 153 5.8 189 7.2
A
Certain markets
A = urban driving (l/100 km)
B = driving on main roads (l/100 km)
C = combined driving (l/100km)
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles
1
,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic
version and without extra equipment. The car's
weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,
08 Specifications
Fuel
08
307
increases fuel consumption and carbon diox-
ide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's val-
ues. Examples of this are:
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels larger
than those fitted as standard on the mod-
el's basic version, then resistance increa-
ses.
High speed results in increased wind resis-
tance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to
1
.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise
in a comparison with the EU driving cycles
1
which are used in the certification of the car
and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel-
eration as well as braking too hard.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre
pressure table on page 248.
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 12 and 216.
See page 220 for general information on fuel.
1
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 682/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - The V70 with the D5 engine and 6-speed
manual transmission is started in 2nd gear under normal conditions. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in
accordance with legal requirements. CO
2
emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and
give the value for CO
2
emissions.
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
308
Approved dimensions
In certain countries not all approved dimen-
sions are indicated by the registration docu-
ment or other documents. The table below
shows all approved combinations of wheel
rims and tyres, and the lowest permitted load
index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Information on
engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) or all-wheel
drive (AWD) and the type of transmission is
needed to read the table. For information with
respect to these details, see page 290.
V70
Engine
FWD/
AWD
man/
aut
LI SS 205/60R16
7Jx16x50
225/55R16
7Jx16x50
225/50R17
7Jx17x50
7.5Jx17x55
245/45R17
8Jx17x55
245/40R18
8Jx18x55
T6 B6304T4 AWD aut 95 W -
3.2 B6324S5 FWD aut 94 V -
3.2 B6324S5 AWD aut 95 V -
D5 D5244T10 FWD man/aut 94 V -
D5 D5244T10 AWD aut 95 V -
D3 D5204T2 FWD man 94 V
aut 94 H
2.5T B5254T10 FWD man/aut 94 V
2.5T B5254T11 FWD man/aut 94 V
- -
2.0T B4204T6 FWD man/aut 92 V
2.0 B4204S3 FWD man/aut 92 H
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
``
309
V70
Engine
FWD/
AWD
man/
aut
LI SS 205/60R16
7Jx16x50
225/55R16
7Jx16x50
225/50R17
7Jx17x50
7.5Jx17x55
245/45R17
8Jx17x55
245/40R18
8Jx18x55
2.0F B4204S4 FWD man/aut 92 H
D2 D4164T FWD man 92 H
- - - -
XC70
Engine
FWD/
AWD
man/
aut
LI SS 215/65R16
7Jx16x50
235/55R17
7.5Jx17x55
235/50R18
7.5Jx18x55
235/45R19
8Jx19x55
T6 B6304T4 AWD aut 96 V
3.2 B6324S5 FWD aut 96 V
3.2 B6324S5 AWD aut 96 V
D5 D5244T10 AWD man 96 V
aut 96 H
D3 D5204T2 AWD man/aut 96 H
2.4D D5244T16 AWD aut 96 H
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
310
Approved tyre pressures
Variant
V70
Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pres-
sure
A
front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
3.2
T6
225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17
245/45 R 17
0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 280 280 300 300 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 270 270 290 290 -
D5 225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17,
245/45 R 17
0-160 220 210 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 270 270 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 270 270 -
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
``
311
Variant
V70
Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pres-
sure
A
front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
2.0
2.0F
2.5
D2
D3
225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17
245/45 R 17
0-160 220 210 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 270 270 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 270 270 -
205/60 R 16 0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 270 270 290 290 -
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
312
Variant
XC70
Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pres-
sure
A
front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
All engines 215/65 R 16
235/55 R 17
235/50 R 18
235/45 R 19
0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260
160 + 240 240 280 280 -
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
08 Specifications
Electrical system
08
313
Electrical system
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the
equipment level in the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
battery of the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
Battery
Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
Reserve capacity
(minutes)
12 520–800 100–160
12 520–700 100–135
12 700–800 135–160
08 Specifications
Type approval
08
314
Remote control system
Country
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,
E, EST, F, FIN, GB,
GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,
LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,
SK, SLO
Delphi hereby
certifies that this
remote control key
system conforms to
the essential char-
acteristic require-
ments and other rel-
evant regulations of
directive 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,
Germany R-
LPD1-03-0151
BR
RC
CCAB06LP1940T4
08 Specifications
Symbols in the display
08
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
315
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols
with their meanings and a reference to where
in the manual further information can be found.
For more information on symbols and text
messages, see pages 70, 71 and 134.
The red warning symbol
illuminates
when a fault has been indicated which could
affect the safety and/or driveability of the car.
At the same time an explanatory text is dis-
played in the information display.
The yellow information symbol
illumi-
nates, in combination with text in the informa-
tion display, when a deviation in any of the car's
systems has occurred. The yellow symbol
information can also illuminate in combination
with other symbols.
Symbols in the display
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Sym-
bol
Meaning Page
Low oil pressure 71
Parking brake 71, 122,
123
Airbags - SRS 19, 71
Seatbelt reminder 16, 71
Alternator not charg-
ing
71
Fault in the brake
system
71, 119
Warning, safety
mode
19, 30,
71, 73
Indicator and information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Sym-
bol
Meaning Page
Fault in the ABL sys-
tem*
70, 83
Emissions system 70
Fault in the ABS sys-
tem
70, 119
Rear fog lamp on 70, 85
Stability system,
DSTC, Hill descent
control
70, 120,
168
Engine preheater
(diesel)
70
Low level in fuel tank 70, 145
Information, read dis-
play text
70
Main beam on 70, 83
08 Specifications
Symbols in the display
08
316
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Sym-
bol
Meaning Page
Left-hand direction
indicators
70
Right-hand direction
indicators
70
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Sym-
bol
Meaning Page
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*
171, 175,
179
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*
179
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*, Distance Alert*
179, 182
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*, Distance Alert*
179, 182
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*
179
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*, Distance Alert*
175, 181
Sym-
bol
Meaning Page
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*, Distance Alert*
175, 181
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*
175
Radar sensor* 179, 188
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor *
188, 191,
194
Auto Brake*, Dis-
tance Alert*, Collision
warning system *
182, 188
G02510
2
Fuel-driven engine
block heater and
passenger compart-
ment heater*
145
ABL system* 83
Sym-
bol
Meaning Page
Fuel filler flap, right-
hand side
219
Low battery 145
Parking brake 123
Rain sensor* 92
Driver Alert System* 191, 191
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning *
191, 194
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning *
194
Driver Alert System*,
Time for a break
191
08 Specifications
Symbols in the display
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
317
Information symbols in the centre
console display
Sym-
bol
Meaning Page
Audio files 153
Directory in CD disc 153
Traffic information 156
Phone* 205, 210
Bluetooth
TM
hands-
free *
206, 208
Parking assistance* 196
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Sym-
bol
Meaning Page
Seatbelt reminder 17
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
22, 23
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
23
09 Alphabetical Index
09
318
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 173
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 83
Active chassis – FOUR-C........................ 170
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 83
Adaptation............................................... 110
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 170
Adaptive cruise control............................ 173
fault tracing......................................... 178
radar sensor........................................ 177
Adaptive cruise control fault tracing........ 178
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 147
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 87
halogen headlamp................................ 88
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 81
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22
driver's and front passenger side......... 20
key switch off........................................ 22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system ........................................... 19
Air conditioning........................................ 141
general................................................ 137
Air conditioning, AC................................. 141
Air distribution.................................. 138, 143
Air vents................................................... 139
Alarm.......................................................... 62
alarm indicator...................................... 62
alarm signals......................................... 62
arming................................................... 62
checking the alarm............................... 46
deactivating.......................................... 62
deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 62
reduced alarm level.............................. 63
temporary disarming of the alarm........ 63
testing the alarm system...................... 63
Alcolock................................................... 103
Allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances.................................................... 138
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 117
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 117
Approach light, duration............................ 87
Audio
headphones socket............................ 149
rear control panel................................ 149
settings............................................... 149
surround............................................. 148
Audio system........................................... 148
functions............................................. 149
overview.............................................. 148
Audio volume
phone.................................................. 207
phone/media player............................ 207
ring signal, phone............................... 207
Auto
climate control settings...................... 141
Automatic car washes............................. 282
Automatic gearbox.................................. 112
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 113
towing and recovery........................... 237
trailer................................................... 232
Automatic locking...................................... 56
Automatic relocking................................... 56
AUX.......................................................... 148
Auxiliary heater........................................ 147
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 117
B
Backrest..................................................... 76
front seat, lowering............................... 76
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 79
09 Alphabetical Index
09
319
Bag holder .............................................. 227
Battery............................................. 271, 313
maintenance....................................... 271
remote control key/PCC....................... 51
start assistance................................... 111
symbols on the battery....................... 271
warning symbols................................. 271
Bioethanol E85........................................ 221
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 199
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 199
Bluetooth
handsfree............................................ 205
mute microphone............................... 207
transfer call to mobile......................... 207
Bonnet, opening...................................... 256
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 261
Brake light.................................................. 84
Brakes...................................................... 118
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 118
brake light............................................. 84
brake system...................................... 118
electric parking brake......................... 122
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 118
emergency brake lights........................ 84
filling brake fluid.................................. 261
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 119
Built-in phone.......................................... 210
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 263
C
Calls
functions during a call................ 210, 211
incoming..................................... 206, 211
operation..................................... 206, 210
volume in phone................................. 211
waiting................................................ 211
Call waiting.............................................. 211
Camera sensor........................................ 187
Car care................................................... 282
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 284
Cargo area
cargo cover......................................... 230
lighting.................................................. 86
loading................................................ 224
mounting points.................................. 225
safety grille.......................................... 229
safety net............................................ 228
Cargo cover............................................. 230
Car upholstery......................................... 284
Car wash.................................................. 282
Catalytic converter................................... 220
recovery.............................................. 237
Centre console........................................ 130
Chassis settings...................................... 170
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 260
Children..................................................... 31
child safety locks.................................. 38
child seats and side airbags................. 24
location in the car................................. 31
safety.................................................... 31
Child safety locks...................................... 61
Child seat................................................... 31
Child seats................................................. 31
integrated two-stage booster cushion. 36
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 38
recommended...................................... 33
size classes for child seats with the ISO-
FIX fixture system................................. 38
upper mounting points for child seats.. 40
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 203
09 Alphabetical Index
09
320
Cleaning
automatic car washes......................... 282
car wash............................................. 282
rims..................................................... 283
seatbelts............................................. 284
upholstery........................................... 284
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 138
Climate control........................................ 137
general................................................ 137
sensors............................................... 137
Clock, setting............................................. 73
CO
2
emissions ........................................ 304
Collision..................................................... 30
Collision warning..................................... 184
Collision warning system
radar sensor................................ 177, 184
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 184
Colour code, paint................................... 285
Combined instrument panel.................... 134
Comfort inside the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 202
Compass................................................. 100
calibration........................................... 100
setting the zone.................................. 100
Condensation in headlamps.................... 282
Controls
centre console.................................... 130
Cooling system........................................ 216
Crash, see Collision................................... 30
Cruise control.......................................... 171
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 138
D
DAB, menu structure............................... 160
DAB Radio............................................... 158
Deadlocks.................................................. 59
deactivation.......................................... 59
temporary deactivation......................... 59
Defroster.................................................. 141
Diesel....................................................... 221
Diesel particle filter.................................. 222
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 259
Direction indicators.................................... 85
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 114
Display lighting.......................................... 82
Distance Alert.......................................... 181
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 148
Door mirrors............................................... 97
Driver Alert Control.................................. 190
Driver Alert System.................................. 190
Driving...................................................... 216
cooling system.................................... 216
with the tailgate open......................... 217
with trailer........................................... 231
Driving in water........................................ 216
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 293
towing capacity.................................. 293
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 168
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 139
Economical driving.................................. 216
ECO pressure.......................................... 248
Electrical socket...................................... 204
cargo area........................................... 227
front seat............................................. 204
Electric parking brake.............................. 122
low battery voltage............................. 122
releasing automatically....................... 123
releasing manually.............................. 123
09 Alphabetical Index
09
321
Emergency calls...................................... 210
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 249
Emergency puncture repair..................... 250
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 222
Engine
overheating......................................... 231
starting................................................ 107
Engine block heater................................. 109
fuel-driven........................................... 144
Engine braking, automatic....................... 120
Engine compartment
coolant................................................ 260
oil........................................................ 258
overview.............................................. 257
power steering fluid............................ 261
Engine oil......................................... 257, 300
adverse driving conditions.................. 300
capacities........................................... 300
filter..................................................... 258
oil grade.............................................. 300
Engine specifications............................... 298
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 12
Error messages
Driver Alert Control............................. 191
Lane Departure Warning..................... 194
see Messages and symbols............... 179
Error messages in BLIS........................... 200
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 182
Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con-
trol............................................................ 179
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External dimensions................................ 292
F
Fan........................................................... 140
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 187
First aid equipment.................................. 249
First aid kit .............................................. 249
Flexifuel.................................................... 109
adaptation........................................... 110
Floor mats................................................ 204
Fluids, capacities..................................... 302
Fluids and oils.......................................... 302
FM, menu structure................................. 157
Fog lamp
front...................................................... 84
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 85
Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 84
Foot brake............................................... 118
FOUR-C – Active chassis........................ 170
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 12
Fuel.......................................................... 220
fuel consumption................................ 304
fuel economy...................................... 248
fuel filter.............................................. 222
Fuse box.................................................. 274
glovebox............................................. 278
Fuses....................................................... 274
box in cargo area................................ 281
changing............................................. 274
general................................................ 274
relay/fuse box in engine compart-
ment.................................................... 275
Fuse table
fuses in engine compartment............. 276
09 Alphabetical Index
09
322
G
Gearbox................................................... 112
automatic............................................ 112
manual................................................ 112
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 114
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-
gagement................................................. 114
Geartronic................................................ 113
Glass
laminated/reinforced............................. 95
Glovebox................................................. 203
locking.................................................. 57
Gross vehicle weight............................... 293
H
Hazard warning flashers............................ 85
HDC......................................................... 120
Headlamp levelling.................................... 82
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 87
Headlamp pattern adjustment
Active Bending Lights .......................... 88
Headlamps............................................... 263
Headphones socket................................. 149
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 78
lowering.......................................... 78, 79
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 93
Heating.................................................... 141
rearview and door mirrors.................... 98
rear window.......................................... 98
seats................................................... 140
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 95
High engine temperature......................... 231
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 93
Hill Descent Control................................. 120
HomeLink
.............................................. 125
Home safe lighting..................................... 87
Hoot........................................................... 81
Horn........................................................... 81
I
IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 138
IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 26
IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information Sys-
tem........................................................... 212
Ignition keys............................................... 74
IMEI number............................................ 213
Immobiliser................................................ 44
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 46
Inflatable curtain........................................ 26
Information and warning symbols............. 70
Information button, PCC............................ 46
Information displays.................................. 69
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 82
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 66
right-hand drive.................................... 68
Instruments and controls........................... 66
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 86
Interior rearview mirror............................... 98
automatic dimming............................... 98
Intermittent wiping..................................... 92
iPod, connection................................... 151
J
Jack......................................................... 247
09 Alphabetical Index
09
323
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 293
Key............................................................. 44
Key blade................................................... 47
Keyless drive...................................... 53, 107
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 53, 107
Keylock.................................................... 114
Keypad in the steering
wheel................................. 81, 130, 171, 210
Key positions............................................. 74
L
Labels...................................................... 290
Laminated glass......................................... 95
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 263
Lane Departure Control........................... 193
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 284
Lighting.................................................... 263
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 83
approach light, duration....................... 87
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment...................................................... 86
bulbs, specifications........................... 268
controls................................................. 86
display lighting...................................... 82
front fog lamps..................................... 84
headlamp levelling................................ 82
home safe lighting................................ 87
in passenger compartment................... 86
instrument lighting................................ 82
main/dipped beam............................... 82
position/parking lamps......................... 84
rear fog lamp........................................ 85
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 263
cargo area........................................... 267
dipped beam halogen......................... 264
direction indicators............................. 265
fog lamp.............................................. 266
lamp housing, rear.............................. 266
lamp housing, rear, direction indica-
tors...................................................... 266
main beam, Xenon lamp..................... 265
main beam halogen............................ 264
number plate lighting.......................... 267
parking lamps..................................... 265
side marker lamps.............................. 266
vanity mirror........................................ 268
Light switches............................................ 82
Loading
cargo area........................................... 224
general................................................ 224
mounting points.................................. 225
roof load............................................. 224
Lock confirmation ..................................... 44
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................... 56
tailgate.................................................. 57
Locks
automatic locking................................. 56
locking.................................................. 56
unlocking.............................................. 56
Lubricants................................................ 302
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 302
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 82
Maintenance
rustproofing........................................ 283
Making calls..................................... 206, 210
Manual gearbox....................................... 112
towing and recovery........................... 237
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 113
09 Alphabetical Index
09
324
Max. roof load ......................................... 293
Memory function in seats.......................... 77
Menus and messages.............................. 130
Menu structure
DAB.................................................... 160
FM....................................................... 157
Messages and symbols
Collision Warning with Auto Brake..... 188
Distance Alert..................................... 182
Driver Alert Control............................. 191
Lane Departure Warning..................... 194
Messages and symbols in the Adaptive
cruise control........................................... 179
Messages in BLIS.................................... 200
Messages in the combined instrument
panel........................................................ 134
Messages in the information display....... 168
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge............................................. 70
speedometer......................................... 70
tachometer........................................... 70
Misting..................................................... 141
attending to the windows................... 137
condensation in headlamps............... 282
remove with the air vents................... 143
timer function...................................... 142
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 208
handsfree............................................ 205
register phone..................................... 205
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 300
Oil level low.............................................. 258
Overheating............................................. 231
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 12
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 285
damage and touch-up........................ 285
Panel lighting............................................. 82
Panic function............................................ 45
Parking assistance................................... 196
parking assistance sensors................ 198
Parking brake........................................... 122
Parking heater.......................................... 144
battery and fuel................................... 144
parking on a hill.................................. 144
time setting......................................... 146
Passenger compartment......................... 202
Passenger compartment filter................. 138
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven........................................... 144
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 45
range............................................... 46, 47
Petrol grade............................................. 220
Phone
built-in, overview................................ 210
connect............................................... 208
handsfree............................................ 205
incoming calls..................................... 206
making calls........................................ 206
messages........................................... 212
on/off.................................................. 210
phone book......................................... 208
phone book, shortcut......................... 208
receiving a call.................................... 207
register phone..................................... 205
ring signal........................................... 211
SIM card............................................. 213
09 Alphabetical Index
09
325
Phone book............................................. 212
Pinch protection, sunroof........................ 102
Polishing.................................................. 283
Position/parking lamps.............................. 84
Power seat................................................. 77
Powershift gearbox.......................... 115, 237
Power sunroof......................................... 101
Power windows......................................... 95
Privacy locking........................................... 49
Puncture, see Tyres................................. 247
Putting calls on hold................................ 211
R
Radar sensor........................................... 173
limitations........................................... 177
Rain sensor................................................ 92
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 267
Rear control panel
audio system...................................... 149
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................. 100
door...................................................... 97
electrically retractable........................... 97
heating.................................................. 98
interior................................................... 98
Rear window, defrosting............................ 98
Recirculation............................................ 142
Recommendations during driving............ 216
Recommended child seats, table.............. 33
Recovery.................................................. 238
Refrigerant............................................... 137
Refuelling................................................. 219
fuel cap............................................... 219
fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 219
fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 219
refuelling............................................. 219
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 274
Remote control, HomeLink
programmable ................................... 125
Remote control key................................... 44
battery replacement.............................. 51
detachable key blade........................... 47
functions............................................... 45
range..................................................... 46
Remote control key system, type appro-
val............................................................ 314
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 98
Resetting the power windows................... 96
Retractable power door mirrors................. 97
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 112
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 283
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 293
Rustproofing............................................ 283
S
Safety grille.............................................. 229
Safety mode.............................................. 30
Safety net................................................. 228
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 76
Seatbelt
rear seat................................................ 17
seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seats.......................................................... 76
head restraints, rear.............................. 78
heating................................................ 140
lowering the front backrest................... 76
lowering the rear backrest.................... 79
09 Alphabetical Index
09
326
power seats.......................................... 77
ventilated front seats.......................... 140
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 225
Service programme................................. 256
Set time interval....................................... 181
Side airbags............................................... 24
Signal input, external............................... 148
SIM card.................................................. 213
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Soot filter................................................. 222
Soot filter full............................................ 222
Spare wheel............................................. 247
temporary spare................................. 247
Spin control............................................. 168
Spin control function............................... 168
Stability and traction control system....... 168
Stability system....................................... 168
Stains....................................................... 284
Start assistance....................................... 111
Steering force, speed related.................. 170
Steering force level, see Steering force... 170
Steering lock............................................ 108
Steering wheel........................................... 81
keypad.................. 81, 130, 148, 171, 210
keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 175
steering wheel adjustment.................... 81
Stone chips and scratches...................... 285
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 202
Sunroof
opening and closing........................... 101
pinch protection.................................. 102
sunscreen........................................... 102
ventilation position.............................. 101
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................. 102
Surround.................................................. 148
Symbols................................................... 168
indicator symbols................................. 70
information symbols............................. 70
warning symbols................................... 70
Symbols and messages
Collision Warning with Auto Brake..... 188
Distance Alert..................................... 182
Driver Alert Control............................. 191
Lane Departure Warning..................... 194
Symbols and messages in the Adaptive
cruise control........................................... 179
T
Tailgate...................................................... 58
locking/unlocking.................................. 57
open...................................................... 58
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 137
Temperature control................................ 141
Testing the alarm system........................... 63
Timer........................................................ 142
Tools........................................................ 247
Total airing function........................... 56, 137
Towbar
detachable, attachment ..................... 234
detachable, removal .......................... 235
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 232
Towing..................................................... 237
towing eye.......................................... 238
Towing capacity....................................... 293
Towing equipment................................... 232
specifications...................................... 233
Towing eye.............................................. 238
Trailer....................................................... 231
cable................................................... 231
driving with a trailer............................ 231
09 Alphabetical Index
09
327
Transmission............................................ 112
Transponder.............................................. 95
Trip computer.......................................... 166
Trip meter.................................................. 73
Type approval, remote control key sys-
tem........................................................... 314
Type designation..................................... 290
Tyres
dimensions......................................... 308
direction of rotation............................ 242
driving characteristics......................... 242
maintenance....................................... 242
pressure...................................... 248, 308
puncture repair................................... 250
specifications.............................. 245, 308
speed ratings...................................... 245
tread wear indicators.......................... 243
winter tyres......................................... 244
U
Unlocking
from the inside...................................... 56
from the outside................................... 56
USB, connection...................................... 151
V
Vanity mirror...................................... 86, 204
Ventilation................................................ 138
Vibration damper..................................... 232
W
Warning lamp
adaptive cruise control....................... 173
collision warning system.................... 184
stability and traction control system. . 168
Warning lamps
airbags SRS.......................................... 71
alternator not charging......................... 71
fault in brake system............................ 71
low oil pressure..................................... 71
parking brake applied........................... 71
seatbelt reminder.................................. 71
warning................................................. 71
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 184
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Warning triangle....................................... 249
Washer fluid, filling................................... 270
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 93
Washers
rear window.......................................... 93
washer fluid, filling.............................. 270
windscreen........................................... 93
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 95
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 283
Waxing..................................................... 283
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 293
Wheels
changing............................................. 246
installation........................................... 246
rims..................................................... 243
snow chains........................................ 244
spare wheel........................................ 247
Wheels and tyres..................................... 242
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 27
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 27
whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windows, rearview and door mirrors......... 95
Windscreen washing.................................. 93
Windscreen wipers.................................... 92
rain sensor............................................ 92
09 Alphabetical Index
09
328
Winter driving........................................... 217
Winter tyres.............................................. 244
Wiper blades............................................ 269
changing............................................. 269
cleaning.............................................. 270
replacing, rear window....................... 270
service position................................... 269
Wipers and washing.................................. 92
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&&,*(:c\a^h]!6I&%'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%&%!8deng^\]i©'%%%"'%&%Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
321

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Volvo V70 - 2011 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Volvo V70 - 2011 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5,33 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Volvo V70 - 2011

Volvo V70 - 2011 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 346 pagina's

Volvo V70 - 2011 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 350 pagina's

Volvo V70 - 2011 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 352 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info